900 0520D 0520 Onan DFHA DFHB DFHC DFHD (spec A J) Genset Operators Manual (10 2011)

User Manual: 900-0520 Onan DFHA DFHB DFHC DFHD (spec A-J) Genset Operators manual (10-2011)

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 219

Download900-0520D 900-0520 Onan DFHA DFHB DFHC DFHD (spec A-J) Genset Operators Manual (10-2011)
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
Operator Manual

Generator Set

with PowerCommandR 3100 Controller

DFHA (Spec A−J)
DFHB (Spec A−J)
DFHC (Spec A−J)
DFHD (Spec A−J)

English − Original Instructions

10−2011

900−0520 (Issue 7)

Table of Contents
SECTION

TITLE

PAGE

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
1

INTRODUCTION
About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How To Obtain Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generator Set Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

3

4

1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-2

CONTROL OPERATION
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
PCC Power On/Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Menu Display and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engine Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Gen Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
CIRCUIT BOARDS AND MODULES
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Digital Board (A32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Engine Interface Board (A31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Analog Board (A33) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Digital Display Board (A35) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Customer Interface Board (A34) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
PT/CT Board (A36) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Bus PT Board (A39) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Genset Communications Module (A41) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Voltage Regulator Output Module (A37) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Governor Output Module (A38) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Master First Start Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
TROUBLESHOOTING
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Resetting the Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Warning and Shutdown Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
PCC Oil Pressure Warning and Shutdown Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
PCC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Rack Position Fault/Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Load Sharing Controls Troubleshoot Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59

i

SECTION
5

TITLE

PAGE

CONTROL SERVICE AND CALIBRATION
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Circuit Board Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Initial Start Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Adjust Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Setup and Calibration Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Engine Torque Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Accessory Box Control Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Engine Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Magnetic Speed Pickup Unit (MPU) Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Current Transformer (CT) Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Digital Board (A32) Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

6

SERVICING THE GENERATOR
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Generator/PCC Control Isolation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Testing the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Exciter Stator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Exciter Rectifier Bridge (Rotating Rectifier Assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Exciter Rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Main Rotor (Generator Field) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Main Stator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Testing the PMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Bearing Inspection/Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Generator Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Generator Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Aligning Generator with Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

7

DAY TANK FUEL TRANSFER PUMP AND CONTROL
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Transfer Pump Motor Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing the Float Switch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

INITIAL SYSTEM STARTUP
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Startup Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Application Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Individual Generator Set Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Black Start Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Reports and Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On Site Power System Application Review
(Diesel/600VAC and Lower) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

7-2
7-4
7-6
7-7
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-2
8-4
8-7
8-8
8-8
8-9

WIRING DIAGRAMS
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

ii

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
EXHAUST GASES ARE DEADLY

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS − This manual contains
important instructions that should be followed during
installation and maintenance of the generator and batteries.

 Provide an adequate exhaust system to properly

expel discharged gases away from enclosed or
sheltered areas and areas where individuals are
likely to congregate. Visually and audibly inspect
the exhaust daily for leaks per the maintenance
schedule. Make sure that exhaust manifolds are secured and not warped. Do not use exhaust gases to
heat a compartment.

Before operating the generator set (genset), read the
Operator’s Manual and become familiar with it and the
equipment. Safe and efficient operation can be
achieved only if the equipment is properly operated
and maintained. Many accidents are caused by failure
to follow fundamental rules and precautions.

 Be sure the unit is well ventilated.
 Engine exhaust and some of its constituents are

The following symbols, found throughout this manual,
alert you to potentially dangerous conditions to the operator, service personnel, or the equipment.

known to the state of California to cause cancer,
birth defects, and other reproductive harm.

This symbol warns of immediate
hazards which will result in severe personal injury or death.

MOVING PARTS CAN CAUSE SEVERE
PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH
 Keep your hands, clothing, and jewelry away from

This symbol refers to a hazard or unsafe practice which can result in severe personal injury or death.
WARNING

moving parts.

 Before starting work on the generator set, discon-

nect battery charger from its AC source, then disconnect starting batteries, negative (−) cable first.
This will prevent accidental starting.

This symbol refers to a hazard or unsafe practice which can result in personal injury
or product or property damage.
CAUTION

 Make sure that fasteners on the generator set are

secure. Tighten supports and clamps, keep guards
in position over fans, drive belts, etc.

FUEL AND FUMES ARE FLAMMABLE

 Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry in the vicinity of

Fire, explosion, and personal injury or death can result
from improper practices.

moving parts, or while working on electrical equipment. Loose clothing and jewelry can become
caught in moving parts.

 DO NOT fill fuel tanks while engine is running, un-

less tanks are outside the engine compartment.
Fuel contact with hot engine or exhaust is a potential
fire hazard.

 If adjustment must be made while the unit is running, use extreme caution around hot manifolds,
moving parts, etc.

 DO NOT permit any flame, cigarette, pilot light,

spark, arcing equipment, or other ignition source
near the generator set or fuel tank.

DO NOT OPERATE IN FLAMMABLE AND
EXPLOSIVE ENVIRONMENTS

 Fuel lines must be adequately secured and free of

Flammable vapor can cause an engine to overspeed and
become difficult to stop, resulting in possible fire, explosion, severe personal injury and death. Do not operate a
genset where a flammable vapor environment can be
created by fuel spill, leak, etc., unless the genset is
equipped with an automatic safety device to block the air
intake and stop the engine. The owners and operators of
the genset are solely responsible for operating the genset safely. Contact your authorized Cummins Power
Generation distributor for more information.

leaks. Fuel connection at the engine should be
made with an approved flexible line. Do not use zinc
coated or copper fuel lines with diesel fuel.

 Be sure all fuel supplies have a positive shutoff
valve.

 Be sure battery area has been well-ventilated prior

to servicing near it. Lead-acid batteries emit a highly
explosive hydrogen gas that can be ignited by arcing, sparking, smoking, etc.

LS-14L

iii

ELECTRICAL SHOCK CAN CAUSE
SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH



Keep multi-class ABC fire extinguishers handy.
Class A fires involve ordinary combustible materials
such as wood and cloth; Class B fires, combustible
and flammable liquid fuels and gaseous fuels; Class
C fires, live electrical equipment. (ref. NFPA No. 10).



Make sure that rags are not left on or near the engine.



Make sure generator set is mounted in a manner to
prevent combustible materials from accumulating
under the unit.



Remove all unnecessary grease and oil from the
unit. Accumulated grease and oil can cause overheating and engine damage which present a potential fire hazard.



Keep the generator set and the surrounding area
clean and free from obstructions. Remove any debris from the set and keep the floor clean and dry.



Do not work on this equipment when mentally or
physically fatigued, or after consuming any alcohol
or drug that makes the operation of equipment unsafe.



Substances in exhaust gases have been identified
by some state or federal agencies as causing cancer or reproductive toxicity. Take care not to breath
or ingest or come into contact with exhaust gases.



Do not store any flammable liquids, such as fuel,
cleaners, oil, etc., near the generator set. A fire or
explosion could result.



Wear hearing protection when going near an operating generator set.



To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot
metal parts such as radiator, turbo charger and exhaust system.

 Remove electric power before removing protective

shields or touching electrical equipment. Use rubber insulative mats placed on dry wood platforms
over floors that are metal or concrete when around
electrical equipment. Do not wear damp clothing
(particularly wet shoes) or allow skin surface to be
damp when handling electrical equipment. Do not
wear jewelry. Jewelry can short out electrical contacts and cause shock or burning.

 Use extreme caution when working on electrical

components. High voltages can cause injury or
death. DO NOT tamper with interlocks.

 Follow all applicable state and local electrical

codes. Have all electrical installations performed by
a qualified licensed electrician. Tag and lock open
switches to avoid accidental closure.

 DO NOT CONNECT GENERATOR SET DIRECT-

LY TO ANY BUILDING ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
Hazardous voltages can flow from the generator set
into the utility line. This creates a potential for electrocution or property damage. Connect only
through an approved isolation switch or an approved paralleling device.

GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


Coolants under pressure have a higher boiling point
than water. DO NOT open a radiator or heat exchanger pressure cap while the engine is running.
Allow the generator set to cool and bleed the system
pressure first.



Used engine oils have been identified by some state
or federal agencies as causing cancer or reproductive toxicity. When checking or changing engine oil,
take care not to ingest, breathe the fumes, or contact used oil.

iv

CONTAINERIZED RENTAL UNITS
POTENTIAL TIPPING PROBLEM

tainer is fully fueled without a semi-tractor under the king
pin. Jack stands for the front of the container are required
to mitigate this potential problem.

On all containerized rental equipment, there is a potential
problem of having the container tip forward over the landing legs, pulling the axles off the ground when the con-

Note: The figure below shows the jack stands and
their placement at the nose of the container.

Jack Stands at Nose of Container

KEEP THIS MANUAL NEAR THE GENSET FOR EASY REFERENCE

LS-14L

iii

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

iv

1. Introduction
ABOUT THIS MANUAL

TEST EQUIPMENT

This manual provides troubleshooting and repair
information regarding the PowerCommand
Control 3100 (PCC) and generators for the
generator set (genset) models listed on the front
cover. Engine service instructions are in the
applicable engine service manual. Operating and
maintenance instructions are in the applicable
Operator’s Manual.
This manual does not have instructions for
servicing printed circuit board assemblies. After
determining that a printed circuit board assembly is
faulty, replace it. Do not repair it. Attempts to repair a
printed circuit board can lead to costly damage to
the equipment.
This manual contains basic (generic) wiring
diagrams and schematics that are included to help
in troubleshooting. Service personnel must use the
actual wiring diagram and schematic shipped with
each unit. The wiring diagrams and schematics that
are maintained with the unit should be updated
when modifications are made to the unit.
Read Important Safety Instructions and carefully
observe all instructions and precautions in this
manual.

To perform the test procedures in this manual, the
following test equipment must be available
 True RMS meter for accurate measurement of
small AC and DC voltages. Fluke models 87 or
8060A are good choices.
 Grounding wrist strap to prevent circuit board
damage due to electrostatic discharge (ESD).
 Battery Hydrometer
 Jumper Leads
 Tachometer or Frequency Meter
 Wheatstone Bridge or Digital Ohmmeter
 Variac
 Load Test Panel
 Megger or Insulation Resistance Meter
 PCC Service Tool Kit (Harness Tool and Sensor Tool)

HOW TO OBTAIN SERVICE
Always give the complete Model, Specification and
Serial number of the generator set as shown on the
nameplate when seeking additional service
information or replacement parts. The nameplate is
located on the side of the generator output box.
WARNING Incorrect service or replacement of
parts can result in severe personal injury or
death, and/or equipment damage. Service personnel must be trained and experienced to perform electrical and mechanical service. Read
and follow Important Safety Instructions, on
pages iii and iv.

.

1-1

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

The PCC monitors frequency from both the
magnetic pick-up (MPU) and the main stator inputs.
The control sends a low power pulse-width
modulated (PWM) signal to the governor output
module, which then sends an amplified signal to the
engine fuel control.

The PCC is a microprocessor-based control for
Onan generator sets. It provides fuel control and
engine speed governing, main alternator voltage
output regulation, and complete generator set
control and monitoring. It also provides controls for
automatic and semi-automatic synchronizing and
automatic load sharing controls for both isolated
bus or utility (mains) paralleling applications.

The Bus PT module reduces the bus voltage to
approximately 18 VAC and provides a signal to the
control for reference in synchronizing the generator
set to the system bus.

The operating software provides control of the
generator set and its performance characteristics,
and displays performance information on a digital
display panel. It accepts menu-driven control and
setup input from the push button switches on the
front panel.

The external PT/CT module reduces generator
voltage to approximately 18 VAC, and produces a
representative AC voltage from CT output current.
The voltage regulation function sends a low power
PWM signal to the voltage regulator output module,
which then sends an amplified signal to the exciter
stator.

GENERATOR SET CONTROL FUNCTION

Oil, coolant, and exhaust temperatures are sensed
by variable resistance element sensors. Oil
pressure is sensed by a capacitive element active
sensor.

Figure1-1 shows some of the control functions. A
more complete block diagram is provided in Section
3. A system schematic is provided in Section 9.

Governor
Output

Fuel
Control

MPU

Regulator
Output

PMG
S

Sensors

N
1
2
3
4







1 2

3

Battery
BT1

Bus PT
Module

4







FIGURE 1-1. GENERATOR SET CONTROL FUNCTIONS

1-2

To
Load

2. Control Operation
GENERAL

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

The following describes the function and operation
of the PowerCommand generator set control. All indicators, displays, meters and control switches are
located on the face of the control panel as illustrated
in Figure 2-1.

AC power is present when the set is running. Do not
open the generator output box while the set is running.
WARNING Contacting high voltage components can cause electrocution, resulting in severe personal injury or death. Do not open the
generator output box while the set is running.
Read and observe all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS in your generator set manuals.
CAUTION The PCC control cabinet must be
opened only by technically qualified personnel.
Lower level voltages (18 VAC to 24 VDC) are
present in PCC control cabinet. These voltages
can cause electrical shock, resulting in personal injury.
Even with power removed, improper handling
of components can cause electrostatic discharge and damage to circuit components.

The PCC control cabinet must be opened only by
technically qualified personnel.
Normally, generator set configuration options are
set at the factory. When a new control is installed on
a generator set or when parts are replaced, the control must be configured for that generator set with
the use of the “Initial Start Setup” portion of the internal software. Setup and calibration procedures are
described in Section 5.
The automatic voltage regulator (AVR) and governor operation characteristic adjustments are also
described in Section 5.

2-1

SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

one of eight “wake up” inputs from remote sensing
switches.

When the PowerCommand control is in the AUTO
mode, it will cause the generator set to start on receiving a signal from a remote device. The PowerCommand control will initiate a starter cranking signal and verify that the engine is rotating. The PowerCommand control will provide sufficient fuel to the
engine to accelerate to start disconnect speed. On
reaching that speed, the control will ramp the generator set to rated speed and voltage.

The wake up signals are:

 Emergency Stop
 Low Coolant Level
 Low Coolant Temperature
 Low Fuel
 Customer Fault Inputs 2 and 3

On reaching rated speed and voltage, the PowerCommand control checks the system bus voltage. If
no bus voltage is present, it will wait for a pulse from
a remote Master First Start Sensor. On receiving
that pulse, the control will signal the paralleling
breaker to close.

 Run Selected on Run/Off/Auto Switch
 Remote Start Signal in Auto Mode
 Self Test switch
To activate and view the menu displays, press and
release the Self Test switch. The PCC will initialize
the operating software and permit operation of the
menu display panel. If no menu selections are
made, the power to the control panel will shut down
after 30 seconds.

If bus voltage is present, the PowerCommand control will check for proper phase rotation, adjust the
generator set to the bus voltage and frequency level, and then synchronize the generator set to the
system bus. When a synchronous condition is
achieved, the control will send a signal to close the
paralleling breaker.

Power On Mode
In the Power On (awake) mode (selector switch S5
on the Digital Board is set to the left), the PCC will
initialize the operating software and permit operation of the menu display panel. (See Figure 3-1 for
S5 location.) Power will stay on until switch (S5) is
set to the Standby mode. It is recommended that
switch S5 be left in the Power On mode in all applications, except those where auxiliary battery
charging is not available.

When the paralleling breaker is closed, the generator set will assume it’s proportional share of the total
load on the system bus.

PCC POWER ON / STANDBY MODE
Standby Mode
In the Standby (sleep) mode (selector switch S5 on
the Digital Board is set to the right and the generator
set is not running), the control’s operating software
is inactive and the LEDs and displays on front panel
are all off.

CAUTION Electrostatic discharge will damage
circuit boards. Always wear a grounding wrist
strap when touching or handling circuit boards
or socket-mounted ICs and when disconnecting or connecting harness connectors.

The operating software is initialized and the front
panel is turned on in response to a run signal or any

2-2

KILOWATT
METER
(PERCENT LOAD)
MENU
SELECTION
SWITCH
(1 of 4)

FREQUENCY
METER

ACTIVE SWITCH
INDICATOR
(1 of 6)

ALPHANUMERIC
DISPLAY

RESET
SWITCH

PCC 3100
LABEL
PARALLELING
BREAKER
SWITCHES AND
INDICATORS

AC
VOLTMETER
(DUAL SCALE)

RUN/OFF/AUTO
SWITCH

MENU
SWITCH

AC AMMETER
(PERCENT AMPS)

UPPER AND LOWER
SCALE INDICATOR

PANEL LAMP
SWITCH

SELF TEST
SWITCH

NON-AUTOMATIC
WARNING
SHUTDOWN
STATUS INDICATORS

PHASE SELECTOR
SWITCH AND
INDICATORS

FIGURE 2-1. FRONT PANEL (PCC 3100)

2-3

EMERGENCY
STOP PUSH
BUTTON

FRONT PANEL

Reset Switch: Press this switch to reset warning
and shutdown messages after the condition has
been corrected. To reset a shutdown message with
the Reset switch, the Run/Off/Auto switch must be
in the Off position.

Figure 2-1 shows the features of the front panel.
AC Voltmeter: Dual scale instrument indicates AC
voltage. Measurement scale in use is shown on
scale indicator lamp.

With the Run/Off/Auto switch in the Auto mode,
shutdown faults can be reset by removing the remote start input and then cycling the remote reset
input.

AC Ammeter: Indicates current output in percent of
maximum rated current. (Percent current is based
on .8 PF.)

Self Test Switch: Press and hold this switch to light
all front panel LEDs and cycle through all shutdown
and warning messages.

Kilowatt Meter: Indicates 3-phase AC power output as percent of rated load.

In the Standby (sleep) mode, with the generator set
not running, the control’s operating software is inactive and the LEDs and displays on front panel are all
off.

Frequency Meter: Indicates generator output frequency in hertz.
Upper and Lower Scale Indicator Lamps: Indicate AC voltmeter scale.

To activate and view the menu displays without
starting the generator set, press and hold the Self
Test switch until the front panel LEDs light. The
PCC will initialize the operating software and permit
operation of the menu display panel. If no menu
selections are made, a software timer will shut
down the power after 30 seconds.

Digital Display: This two-line, 16-character per line
alphanumeric display is used in the menu-driven
operating system, in conjunction with the display
menu selection switches and the Menu switch. Refer to the menu trees later in this section. The display is also used to show warning and shutdown
messages.

Panel Lights Switch: Press this switch to turn control panel illumination on and off. The illumination
will shut off after about eight minutes.

Display Menu Selection Switches: Four momentary switches—two on each side of the digital display window—are used to step through the various
menu options and to adjust generator set parameters. The green arrow adjacent to the switch is lit
when the switch can be used (switch is “active”).

Phase Selector Switch and Indicators: Press this
momentary switch to select phases of generator
output to be measured by the analog AC voltmeter
and ammeter. LEDs indicate the selected phase.
Run/Off/Auto Switch: This switch starts and stops
the set locally, or enables start/stop control of the
engine from a remote location. (Ground to start.)

Menu Switch: Press this switch to return the digital
display to the MAIN MENU. Refer to the menu trees
later in this section.

2-4

Shutdown Status Indicator: This red lamp is lit
whenever the control detects a shutdown condition.
After the condition is corrected, shutdown indicators can be reset by turning the Run/Off/Auto switch
to the Off position, and pressing the Reset switch.
In Auto mode, shutdowns can be reset by removing
the remote start input and then cycling the remote
reset input.

Emergency Stop Button: Push the switch in for
emergency shutdown of the engine.
Remote Reset switch will not reset emergency stop.
Can only be reset at the PCC front panel.

To reset:
1. Pull the button out or turn the switch clockwise
(button with arrow) and allow it to pop out.
2. Move the Run/Off/Auto switch to Off.
3. Press the front panel Reset switch.
4. Select Run or Auto, as required.

Emergency Stop shutdown status (Code 102) can be
reset only at the PCC front panel.

Non-Automatic Status Indicator: This red lamp
flashes continuously when the Run/Off/Auto switch
is not in the Auto position.

Paralleling Breaker Switches and Indicators:
These two switches are used to manually open or
close the paralleling breaker of the generator set.
The lamps are used to indicate the opened or
closed position of the paralleling breaker.

Warning Status Indicator: This yellow lamp is lit
whenever the control detects a warning condition.
After the condition is corrected, warning indicators
can be reset by pressing the Reset switch. (It is not
necessary to stop the generator set.)

The Breaker Operation switches are operational only
when the Run/Off/Auto switch is in the Run position.
The breaker will close when the generator set is synchronized with the system bus, or if the system bus
is de-energized.

With the Run/Off/Auto switch in the Auto mode,
warnings can also be reset by cycling the remote reset input after the condition is corrected.

2-5

FIGURE 2-2. DIGITAL DISPLAY AND MENU SELECTION SWITCHES

MENU DISPLAY AND SWITCHES

MAIN MENU
The facing page shows the main menu and a block
representation of the available submenus.

Figure 2-2 shows the digital display and the menu
selection switches. Refer to heading “Front Panel”
which describes the menu display and switches.

As shown in the diagram, the main menu can
branch into one of four directions.
To display engine parameters, such as oil pressure
and temperature, water temperature, engine speed
(RPM), and exhaust temperature, press the button
next to the word “ENGINE” in the display. Refer to
ENGINE MENU in this section.

In the Standby Mode, to activate and view the menu
displays without starting the generator set, press
and release the Self Test switch. This will initialize
the PCC operating software and permit operation of
the menu display panel. If no menu selections are
made, a software timer will shut down the power after 30 seconds. In the Power On Mode, power is
continuously supplied to the control panel. Display
will always remain on.

To display generator parameters, such as volts,
amps, power (kW), and frequency, press the button
next to the word “GEN” in the display. Bus voltage,
frequency and a digital synchroscope can also be
viewed from this menu branch. Turn to the GEN
MENU in this section.
To adjust output voltage and frequency, or start and
stop delays, press the button next to the word “ADJUST” in the display. Refer to ADJUST MENU in
Section 5.

In the digital display, the “>>” symbol indicates that
selecting the adjacent button causes the operating
program to branch to the next menu display—as
shown in the menu diagrams.

To display the selected generator set model and the
resident version software, press the button next to
the “>>” in the display. Refer to VERSION & DISPLAYS MENUS in Section 5.

In the digital display, the “<<” symbol indicates that
selecting the adjacent button causes the operating
program to go back to the previous menu display.

2-6

MAIN MENU
PAGES 2-8 & 2-9

PAGES 2-10 & 2-11

RPM
EXHAUST

<<

%GOV / REG
FREQUENCY

<<

BATTERY
HOURS

<<
>>

POWER
KW HRS

<<
>>

OIL
COOLANT

<<
>>

VOLTS
AMPS

<<
>>

<

ENGINE

GEN

>

<

ADJUST

>>

>

MENU

>

RESET
CLEAR WARNING AND
SHUTDOWN MESSAGES

 VOLTAGE
 _______

>>

 FREQUENCY
 _______

>>

RETURN TO
MAIN MENU

SECTION 5

VERSION
SETUP / CAL
HISTORY

(ACCESS CODE)

 START DELAY
 _______ SEC >>
 STOP DELAY
 _______SEC

SECTION 5

DISPLAY CAL
METERS

<<
>>

SECTION 5

GOV / REG
PARALLEL

<<
SETUP

RACKTEST

<<

>>

 IDLE SPEED
 _______RPM >>

SECTION 5
SECTION 5
INACTIVE BUTTON

< ACTIVE BUTTON
< ACTIVE BUTTON SELECTED

2-7

ENGINE MENU
BATTERY/HOURS submenu: From the OIL/
COOLANT submenu, press the button next to the
“>>” in the display to move to the BATTERY/
HOURS submenu. Select BATTERY for a display
of battery voltage. Select HOURS for a display of
the number of starts and the running hours. When
battery or hours parameters are displayed, pressing the button next to the “<<” will return the display
(“BACK”) to the BATTERY/HOURS submenu.

The facing page shows a block representation of
the ENGINE menu. If you press the button next to
the word “ENGINE” in the display, the first ENGINE
submenu will appear.
As shown in the diagram, the ENGINE menu has
three submenus.
OIL/COOLANT submenu: This is the first submenu. Select OIL for a display of oil pressure and oil
temperature. Select COOLANT for a display of
coolant temperature. When oil or coolant parameters are displayed, pressing the button next to the
“<<” will return the display (“BACK”) to the OIL/
COOLANT submenu.

RPM/EXHAUST submenu: From the BATTERY/
HOURS submenu, press the button next to the “>>”
in the display to move to the RPM/EXHAUST submenu. Select RPM for a display of engine RPM.
Select EXHAUST for a display of the (optional) exhaust temperature. When RPM or exhaust parameters are displayed, pressing the button next to the
“<<” will return the display (“BACK”) to the RPM/EXHAUST submenu.

2-8

ENGINE
<
<

ENGINE
ADJUST

GEN
>>

>
>

< OIL
< COOLANT

<<
>>

___PSI / KPA
___F / C

>
>

< OIL
< COOLANT

<<
>>

>
>

< OIL
< COOLANT

<<
>>

>
>

< OIL
< COOLANT

<<
>>

>
>

<<

BACK
>

BACK
L___F / C
<<
>
R___F / C (or N/A)

< ENGINE
< ADJUST

GEN
>>

>
>

<<
>>

>
>

BATTERY
___

<<

BACK
>

< BATTERY
< HOURS

<<
>>

>
>

STARTS ___
HOURS ___

<<

BACK
>

< BATTERY
< HOURS

<<
>>

>
>

OIL
COOLANT

<<
>>

>
>

< BATTERY
< HOURS

<<
>>

>
>

< RPM
< EXHAUST

<<

>

<<

BACK
>

< RPM
< EXHAUST

<<

>

< RPM
< EXHAUST

<<

>

< BATTERY
< HOURS

<
<

RPM
___

L___F/C (or N/A) <<
R___F/C (or N/A)

< BATTERY
< HOURS

<<
>>

BACK
>

>
>

Indicates OR" Condition

2-9

GEN MENU
turn the display (“BACK”) to the POWER/KW
HOURS submenu.

The facing page shows a block representation of
the GEN menu. If you press the button next to the
word “GEN” in the display, the first GEN submenu
will appear.

The PF reading will contain an asterisk if the power
factor is leading (for example, *.3PF).

As shown in the diagram, the GEN menu has three
submenus.

Beginning Version 1.06, N/A is displayed in the PF
field when the generator set is not running.

%GOV/REG/FREQUENCY submenu: From the
POWER/KW HOURS submenu, press the button
next to the “>>” in the display to move to the %GOV/
REG/FREQUENCY submenu. Select %GOV/REG
for a display of voltage regulator and governor duty
cycle (drive) levels in percentage of maximum. Select FREQUENCY for a display of the generator
output frequency the bus frequency, or the digital
synchroscope. When voltage regulator and governor or frequency parameters are displayed, pressing the button next to the “<<” will return the display
(“BACK”) to the %GOV/REG/FREQUENCY submenu.

VOLTS/AMPS submenu: This is the first submenu. Select VOLTS for a display of a line-to-line or
line-to-neutral selection, or for viewing of the system bus line-to-line voltage. Select line-line or lineneutral for the desired voltage display. Select
AMPS for a display of L1, L2, and L3 current in
amps. When voltage or current parameters are displayed, pressing the button next to the “<<” will return the display (“BACK”) to the L-L/L-N submenu.
If DELTA is selected in the Initial Start Setup submenu, when selecting VOLTS, the “line-line” or “lineneutral” submenus will not be displayed, only the
L12, L23, L31 submenu will be displayed.

Bus Frequency (Digital Synchroscope) submenu: When the bus frequency (digital synchroscope)
information is displayed, the operator can observe
the generator set synchronizing with the system
bus. The display indicates bus frequency and number of degrees from synchronous condition (+ indicates faster, − indicates slower). When the generator set is operating within the sync-check window,
an asterisk will indicate that the paralleling breaker
can be closed.

POWER / KW HOURS submenu: From the
VOLTS/AMPS submenu, press the button next to
the “>>” in the display to move to the POWER/KW
HOURS submenu. Select POWER for a display of
power output in kilowatts and a power factor value.
Select KW HOURS for a display of kilowatt hours.
When power or kW hours parameters are displayed, pressing the button next to the “<<” will re-

2-10

<
<

ENGINE
ADJUST

< VOLTS
< AMPS

GEN
>>

>
>

<<
>>

>
>

< VOLTS
< AMPS

<<
>>

>
>

< VOLTS
< AMPS

<<
>>

>
>

< VOLTS
< AMPS

<<
>>

>
>

GEN
< L−L
< L−N

<<
BUS

>

L12 L23
___ ___

< L−L
< L−N

<<
BUS

>

L1N L2N
___ ___

< L−L
< L−N

<<
BUS

>

L12 L23
___ ___

< L−L
< L−N

<<
BUS

<
<
<
<

<<

BACK
>

ENGINE
ADJUST

GEN
>>

>
>

<<
>>

L3N
___
L31
___

<<

BACK
>

<<

BACK
>

<<

BACK
>

<<

BACK
>

<<

BACK
>

<<

BACK
>

<<

BACK
>

BACK
>

L1 L2
L3
___ ___ ___

POWER
KW HRS

L31
___

>
>

<
<

POWER
KW HRS

<<
>>

>
>

<
<

POWER
KW HRS

<<
>>

>
>

___ KW
___ PF
KW HRS
____________

BACK

<
<

< %GOV / REG
< FREQUENCY

POWER
KW HRS

<<
>>

>
>

< %GOV / REG
< FREQUENCY

<<

>

GOV __ %
REG __ %

< %GOV / REG
< FREQUENCY

<<

>

FREQUENCY
___ HZ

<<
BUS

FREQUENCY
___ HZ

<<
BUS

BUS FREQUENCY<<
___ HZ ___ DEG

Indicates OR" Condition

2-11

BACK
>

>
BACK
>

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

2-12

3. Circuit Boards and Modules
GENERAL

The system schematics are provided in Section 9 of
this manual.

This section describes the function of the PCC circuit boards and modules that are contained in the
control panel (Figure 3-1) and the accessory box.
The block diagram in Figure 3-2, shows both internal and external components of the PCC system.

CAUTION Electrostatic discharge will damage
circuit boards. Always wear a grounding wrist
strap when touching or handling circuit boards
or socket-mounted ICs.

S5 POWER ON/
STANDBY SWITCH

J1 (FOR INPOWER
SERVICE TOOL)

DIGITAL BOARD
A32
DISPLAY BOARD
A35

GENSET
COMM.
BOARD
A41

ENGINE INTERFACE
A31

ANALOG
BOARD
A33

CUSTOMER INTERFACE
A34

RUN/OFF/AUTO
SWITCH S12
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
OUTPUT MODULE
A37

BUS PT MODULE
A39

GOVERNOR
OUTPUT MODULE
A38

PT/CT
BOARD
A36

FIGURE 3-1. CIRCUIT BOARD LOCATIONS

3-1

FIGURE 3-2. BLOCK DIAGRAM

3-2

DIGITAL BOARD (A32)

J2

The digital circuit board (Figure 3-3) contains the
microprocessor and the operational software for the
control. It connects to all other boards inside the
control. This board also provides the analog-to-digital conversions for the PCC.

J3
J4
J5

Switch
S5

LEDs

Slide the switch to the left to select the Power
On (awake) mode. Control panel power/operating software will remain on until the switch is
reset to the Standby mode. It is recommended that switch S5 be left in the Power On
mode in all applications, except those where
auxiliary battery charging is not available.

The digital board has seven LED’s that indicate the
following conditions:
Spare (Green)
Spare (Green)
+18 VDC supply OK (Green)
+5 VDC supply OK (Green)
Run (Flashes once per second if software
is running) (Green)
DS6 +24 VDC B+ supply OK (Green)
DS7 +12 VDC supply OK (Green)
DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4
DS5

Slide right to put the PCC in the Standby
(“sleep”) mode. In this mode, the PCC operating software will be initiated by selection of
Run on the front panel, by pressing the Self
Test switch, by a remote start input (in Auto
mode), or by any one of several “wake-up”
signals from external switches.

Resistors
The three resistors (R36, R37 and R38) are used to
configure the digital board to the generator set model number. Refer to Digital Board (A32) Calibration
in Section 5, which provides a detailed description
of how to configure this board.

Connectors
The digital board has five connectors. They are:
J1

Connects to J4 on A34 Customer Interface
board
Connects to J2 on A33 Analog board
Connects to J1 on A31 Engine Interface
board
Connects to J5 on A35 Digital Display assembly

For InPower Service Tool

DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4

DS7
DS6
DS5

FIGURE 3-3. DIGITAL BOARD (A32)

3-3

R36
R37
R38

ENGINE INTERFACE BOARD (A31)

J4

The engine interface board (Figure 3-4) reads user
control inputs, monitors engine, generator and system status, and initiates the appropriate action for
normal operating and fault conditions (warning or
shutdown).

J5
J6
J7

Fuses

This board is connected to the engine sensors, battery, starter, governor output module, voltage regulator output module, and the magnetic pick-up
(MPU).

The engine interface board has two replaceable
fuses. They are:
F1
F3

The engine interface board can also be connected
to an optional network interface module for network
access.

Control B+ (5 Amps)
Aux. B+ (5 Amps). (Panel lamps and run/start
contacts).

LED’s

During a typical start sequence the LED’s light as
follows:

The engine interface board has 10 LED’s that indicate the following conditions:

1. DS11 lights when a remote run signal is received and S12 is in the Auto possition, or S12
is moved to the Run position.
2. DS12 lights when the magnetic pick-up voltage
is sensed (engine is cranking). (When the engine is cranking, the mag pickup output should
be a minimum of 1 volt.)
3. DS11 extinguishes, DS9 lights and DS10 is
dimly lit when the generator is running.

Low Fuel Alarm input (Red)
Low Coolant Level Alarm input (Red)
Low Engine Temperature Alarm input (Red)
S12 in Run position (Green). S12 is the Run/
Off/Auto switch.
DS5 S12 in Auto position (Green)
DS6 Emergency Stop (Red)
DS7 Not configured.
DS8 Not configured.
DS9 Automatic voltage regulator duty cycle
(Green). Brighter indicates larger duty
cycle.
DS10 Governor duty cycle (Green). Brighter indicates larger duty cycle.
DS11 Start pilot relay output (Red)
DS12 Run pilot relay output (Red)
DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4

Connectors
The engine interface board has seven connectors
and one terminal strip. They are:
J1
J2
J3

Connects to customer connections and to engine harness which includes magnetic pickup.
Connects to engine sensors.
Connects to Genset Control module (GCM).
Connects to Genset Control module (GCM).

Connects to J4 on A32 Digital board.
Connects to J1 on A33 Analog board.
Connects to display board, front panel
switches and meters.

3-4

DS1 - LOW FUEL
DS2 - LO COOL
DS3 - LET

DS4 - RUN SW
DS5 - AUTO
DS6 - E-STOP

DS9 - REG
DS10 - GOV
DS11 - START
DS12 - RUN RLY

5A CNTRL B+

5A AUX B+

FIGURE 3-4. ENGINE INTERFACE BOARD

3-5

ANALOG BOARD (A33)

Connectors

The analog board (Figure 3-5) is the only circuit
board inside the control that has no LED’s. There
are two versions of the analog board that are used
for paralleling and non-paralleling systems.

The analog board has four connectors with ribbon
cables permanently soldered to them. They are:
J1

This board interprets all analog input signals and
converts the analog signals to 0−5 VDC for the digital board.

J2
J3
J4

Connects to J2 on A31 Engine Interface
board
Connects to J3 on A32 Digital board
Spare analog inputs
Connects to J1 on A34 Customer Interface
board

FIGURE 3-5. ANALOG BOARD

3-6

DIGITAL DISPLAY BOARD (A35)

DS12
DS13
DS14
DS15
DS20
DS21
DS22

The digital board (Figure 3-6) connects to all meters
and the LED display.

Connectors
The digital board has three connectors. They are:
J1
J5

J6

Connects to front panel membrane switches
Connects to J2 on A32 Digital board. (With J5
disconnected, the display will be non-functional, but the PCC will continue to operate.)
Connects to meters, Run/Off/Auto switch, J3
on A31 Engine Interface board

DS23
DS24
DS25
DS26

LEDs

DS27
DS29
DS36

The digital board has 18 LED’s that are used to indicate operational status of the generator set and
control panel mode/switch selections.
DS9 Not In Auto (Red)
DS10 Upper Scale (Green)
DS11 Left Top Arrow (Green)

DS37

Right Top Arrow (Green)
Warning (Amber)
Lower Scale (Green)
Shutdown (Red)
Left Bottom Arrow (Green)
Right Bottom Arrow (Green)
Automatic mains failure (AMF) or paralleling
application only: Breaker Closed (Red)
Phase A (Green)
Reset Arrow (Green)
Menu Arrow (Green)
AMF application only: Breaker Open
(Green)
Phase B (Green)
Phase C (Green)
AMF application: Breaker Closed (Red) − or
− paralleling application: Breaker Open
(Green)
AMF application only: Breaker Open
(Green)

DS9
DS13

DS11

DS12

DS20

DS21

DS24

DS25

DS15

DS22
DS26

DS36
DS37

FIGURE 3-6. DIGITAL DISPLAY BOARD

3-7

DS10
DS14

DS23
DS27
DS29

CUSTOMER INTERFACE BOARD (A34)

DS13
DS14
DS15
DS16

The customer interface board (Figure 3-7) connects
to the PT/CT board to bring in voltage and current. It
also connects to customer inputs and outputs. Note
that there are two versions of this board, for parallel
and non-parallel generator sets.

Connectors

DS17

The customer interface board has five connectors.
They are:
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5

Customer connections
Customer connections
A36 PT/CT Board and customer connections
Connects to J2 on A32 Digital board
Connects to J4 on A33 Analog board

DS18

DS19

LEDs
The customer interface board has 27 LED’s that indicate the following conditions:
Master First Start Input (Green) − paralleling
application only
DS2 Pre low oil pressure output relay K14 (Red)
DS3 Customer Fault #4 Input (Red)
DS4 Customer Fault #1 Input (Red)
DS5 Low oil pressure output relay K15 (Red)
DS6 Fault Reset Input (Red)
DS7 Engine Idle (Green)
DS8 Paralleling Breaker Close Input (Green)
[paralleling function is load demand]
DS9 Paralleling Breaker Open Input (Green)
DS10 Paralleling Breaker Position Input (Green)
DS11 Customer Fault #2 input (Red)
DS12 Low coolant output relay K17 (Red)
DS1

DS20

DS21
DS22
DS23
DS24
DS25
DS26
DS27

3-8

Low Fuel Input (Red)
Remote Start input (Green)
Customer Fault #3 input (Red)
Paralleling Breaker Control input relay energized from Digital board (Green). This output is activated to close the paralleling
breaker.
Common Alarm output relay energized from
Digital board (Green)
This output is activated only on a shutdown condition.
Spare output relay energized from Digital
board (Green)
This output is activated only on a warning condition.
Load Dump output relay energized from
Digital board (Red)
If overload or underfrequency for 5 seconds, this output is activated (before shutdown).
Ready to Load output relay energized from
Digital board (Green)
This output is activated when AC voltage
and frequency exceed 90% of nominal.
Pre high engine temperature output relay
K8 (Red)
Not in auto output relay K6 (Red)
High engine temperature output relay K9
(Red)
Overspeed output relay K10 (Red)
Overcrank output relay K11 (Red)
Low engine temperature output relay K12
(Red)
Low fuel output relay K13 (Red)

DS1 - MA 1ST START
DS3 - CUST FAULT4
DS4 - CUST FAULT1
DS6 - FAULT RESET
DS7 - ENG IDLE
DS8 - LOAD DEMAND
DS9 - BRKR TRIP/INHBIT
DS10 - BRKR CLOSED
DS11 - CUST FAULT2
DS13 - LOW FUEL
DS14 - RMT START
DS15 - CUST FAULT3

DS16 - CLOSE BKR
DS17 - COMMON SHTDN
DS18 - COMMON WARNING
DS19 - LOAD DUMP
DS20 - READY TO LOAD
DS21 - [K8] PRE-HET
DS22 - [K6] NOT IN AUTO
DS23 - [K9] HET
DS24 [K10] OVERSPEED
DS25 - [K11] OVERCRANK
DS26 - [K12] LET
DS27 - [K13] LOW FUEL

FIGURE 3-7. CUSTOMER INTERFACE BOARD

3-9

DS2 - [K14] PRE-LOP

DS5 - [K15] LOP

DS12 - [K7]
LOW COOL

PT/CT BOARD (A36)

Connectors

The PT/CT board (Figure 3-8) is mounted inside the
accessory box. This board converts generator output voltage to approximately 18 VAC levels for the
analog board. It also converts CT .55 amp (at full
load) output to approximately 1.65 VAC (at full load)
input for the analog board.

The PT/CT board has two connectors. They are:
J8
Connects to J3 on A34 Customer Interface
board
J9
Connects to AC harness (generator output
voltage and CTs)
J9 wiring connections:
Yellow Gen. A In
Orange Gen. B In
Red
Gen. C In
Brown Gen. Common In
White CT21 (+) In
Gray
CT21 (common) In
Grn/Ylw CT22 (+) In
Black CT22 (common) In
Purple CT23 (+) In
Blue
CT23 (common) In

There are three versions of this board. For proper
operation, the PT/CT board must be correctly
matched to the generator set.
In addition, there is a specific set of CTs for each
genset. For proper operation, the CTs must also be
correctly matched to the genset output current.

J9

J8

FIGURE 3-8. PT/CT BOARD

3-10

BUS PT MODULE (A39)
The bus PT module (Figure 3-9) is mounted inside
the accessory box. This module converts the bus
output voltage (from the load side of the paralleling
breaker) to 18 VAC and provides this to the analog
board. It provides a reference signal to the PowerCommand Control for synchronizing the generator
set output to a system bus. There are four versions
of this module, for primary voltages of 69, 120, 240
or 346 volts AC line to neutral. For proper operation,
the correct bus PT module must be installed in the
generator set. Correct phasing is also important as
the system uses the bus PT module output for both
protection and control of the generator set.

Connectors
The bus PT module has two terminal blocks. They
are:
TB1 Bus voltage connections.
N bus neutral
A bus A phase (U)
B bus B phase (V)
C bus C phase (W)
TB2 Bus PT output for PowerCommand control.

FIGURE 3-9. BUS PT MODULE

3-11

GENSET COMMUNICATIONS MODULE
(A41)

PCC data such as voltage, oil pressure, current, engine speed, and not in auto status; and provides
that information to the network.
The GCM also facilitates remote monitoring and
limited remote control of the genset that PCC controls. Outputs from the GCM can ’wake up’ the PCC
when needed, or issue start commands to the genset. The GCM also includes a terminate circuit for
use at the end of a network data bus.
The GCM module is powered from the genset starting batteries. It is operational at all times when powered, even if the PCC is asleep.
The GCM module is mounted on stand-off mounting legs above the analog board (A33).
Refer to the Power Command Network Installation
and Operator’s Manual (900-0366) for information
on installation and use of the GCM module.

The genset communications module (GCM) is required to connect the PCC to a PowerCommand
(LonWorks) network, and communicate with other
network modules. The GCM module is an optional
feature, and it is available as a field upgrade kit for
applications where the feature must be added in the
field. The PC must be operating with firmware version 1.06 or later. For model DFH gensets only, firmware must be version 1.04 or later.)
The GCM provides an interface for data transfer between the PowerCommand control and other modules on the network. It communicates with the PCC
through a serial port on the PCC, as well as monitoring various PCC inputs to determine the operating
state of the control. For example, the GCM monitors

J6

J7
TERMINATE
SWITCH S3

BATTERY
VOLTAGE
SWITCH S4

SERVICE
SWITCH S1

RESET
SWITCH S2

FIGURE 3-10. GENSET COMMUNICATIONS MODULE

3-12

VOLTAGE REGULATOR OUTPUT MODULE
(A37)

J10 Connects to engine harness (power)
J10 wiring connections:
Green Phase A PMG power

The voltage regulator output module (Figure 3-11)
is a power amplifier. This board is used to amplify
the pulse-width modulated (PWM) signal from the
PCC to drive the exciter windings. Power from the
PMG is used by this board to amplify the PWM signal.

Yellow Phase B PMG power
Orange Phase C PMG power
Red
X (Field +) Output
Brown

Connectors

LEDs

The voltage regulator output module has two connectors. They are:
J7

XX (Field −) Output

The voltage regulator output module has 3 LED’s
that indicate the following conditions.

Connects to engine harness (control)
J7 wiring connections:
Gray
Regulator Drive (+) Input
White Regulator Drive (-) Input
Blue
B+ Input (RUN signal)
Purple Ground Input
Grn/Yel Start in
Black Start solenoid

DS1 On when voltage regulator isolated supply is
operating (Green)
DS2 Output Duty Cycle − Brighter when load increases − larger duty cycle (Amber). The duty
cycle range of the PWM signal is 0 - 60%. Because the normal duty cycle is less than 10%,
the output duty cycle LED, DS2 will normally
be very dimly lit.
DS3 Backup start disconnect − On when start disconnect is true (Green). The backup start disconnect is initiated at about 850 RPM, when
sensed PMG voltage is greater than 105 volts
RMS.

DS1 - ISOLATED SUPPLY
DS2 - OUTPUT DUTY CYCLE
DS3 - BACKUP START DISCONNECT

J7

J10

FIGURE 3-11. VOLTAGE REGULATOR OUTPUT MODULE (A37)

3-13

GOVERNOR OUTPUT MODULE (A38)

Left Actuator Drive (15 Amps)
Right Actuator Drive (15 Amps)
Switched B+ (10 Amps)
B+ Fused (10 Amps)

F1
F2
F3
F4

The governor output module (Figure 3-12) receives
a low power, 3 kHz pulse-width modulated (PWM)
command from the engine interface board (A31).
This module drives the two fuel actuators (right and
left) with a feed back-controlled, 200 Hz PWM power output stage. The governor module also has both
right and left 0-5 volt actuator position voltages
which are used for actuator diagnostics.

LEDs
The governor output module has six LED’s that indicate the following conditions:
DS1 (Green) Run command signaling governor
module is active.
DS2 (Green) 5 volt power supply is active.
DS3 (Green) Left actuator drive is active. The PCC
duty cycle range is 25 - 93%. When running,
the maximum duty cycle is about 63%. Note
that the brighter the LED, the larger the duty
cycle.
DS4 (Green) Right actuator drive is active. See
DS3 description.
DS5 (Red) Left actuator fault indicator. If the actuator is more than 1.5 mm form its commanded
position, the fault indicator will be ON. Note
that the actuator has maximum range of 0 −
21mm. During transients and starting sequences, the fault indicator will become active for short (200 millisecond) periods.
DS6 (Red) Right actuator fault indicator. See DS5
description.

Connectors
The governor output module has two connectors.
They are:
J6
Inputs: Run Signal, B+, Governor Command (from
engine interface board)
Outputs: B+ (fused), SwB+, actuator position voltages (R, L), and Rack Position Fault
J13
Inputs: (R, L) Actuator position sensing signals
Outputs: (R, L) Actuator drive

Fuses
The governor output module has four fuses to protect it from overloads and groundfaults. They are:

DS3
DS1
DS4
F1

BANK TO
BANK
R54

DS2

F2

DS5

K1

DS6

K2

X1

F3

LH
LOOP

RH
LOOP
R63

FIGURE 3-12. GOVERNOR OUTPUT MODULE (A38)

3-14

F4

R68

MASTER FIRST START SENSOR

The sequence of operation of the control system is
as follows: On a signal to start, all generator sets in a
system simultaneously start, and accelerate to
rated speed and voltage. The Master First Start
Sensor continuously provides pulses to each PowerCommand control. When the PowerCommand
control receives the pulse from the Master First
Start Sensor, if it is ready to close to the bus, an interlock signal is sent to all other controls to prevent
their respective paralleling breakers from closing. A
close signal is then provided to the generator set
paralleling breaker.

The First Start Sensor System is an Onan control
sub-system which is used to sense when a generator set is ready to close to a de-energized system
bus and to prevent more than one generator set
from closing to a dead bus on automatic system
starting. The First Start Sensor System for PowerCommand generator sets is composed of control algorithms within the PowerCommand control and a
Master First Start Sensor, which is usually mounted
in a remote master control panel.

3-15

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3-16

4. Troubleshooting
GENERAL

High voltages are present when the genset is running. Do not open the generator output box while
the genset is running.

The PowerCommand Control 3100 (PCC) continuously monitors engine sensors for abnormal conditions, such as low oil pressure and high coolant
temperature. If any of these conditions occur, the
PCC will light a yellow Warning lamp or a red Shutdown lamp and display a message on the digital display panel.

Ignition of explosive battery gases
can cause severe personal injury or death. Arcing at battery terminals, light switch or other
equipment, flame, pilot lights and sparks can ignite battery gas. Do not smoke, or switch
trouble light ON or OFF near battery. Discharge
static electricity from body before touching batteries by first touching a grounded metal surface.
WARNING

In the event of a shutdown fault (red Shutdown
lamp), the PCC will stop the generator set (genset)
and close a set of contacts that can be wired to trip a
circuit breaker. If the genset is stopped for this reason, the operator can restart the genset after making adjustments or corrections.

Ventilate battery area before working on or near
battery—Wear goggles—Stop genset and disconnect charger before disconnecting battery
cables—Disconnect negative (−) cable first and
reconnect last.

This section contains the following information:

 Table 4-1: Contains a list of all status codes, in-








cluding the displayed message and status indicator. Also references the page number that
contains a description of each code.
Table 4-2: Describes each warning and shutdown code, warning and shutdown limits
where applicable, and basic corrective actions,
such as, checking fluid levels, control reset
functions, battery connections, etc.
Table 4-3: Lists the PCC oil pressure warning
and shutdown limits.
Tables 4-4 through 4-36: Provide detailed
troubleshooting procedures.
Table 4-37: Describes the analog circuit board
inputs and outputs.
Table 4-38: Describes the location and function of each fuse.

Disconnect battery charger from AC
source before disconnecting battery cables.
Otherwise, disconnecting cables can result in
voltage spikes damaging to DC control circuits
of the genset.
CAUTION

WARNING Accidental starting of the generator
set can cause severe personal injury or death.
Prevent accidental starting by disconnecting
the negative (−) cable from the battery terminal.

When troubleshooting a generator set that is shut
down, make certain the generator set cannot be accidentally restarted as follows:
1. Move the Run/Off/Auto switch on the control
panel to the OFF position.

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

2. Turn off or remove AC power from the battery
charger.

Contacting high voltage components can cause electrocution, resulting in severe personal injury or death. Keep the output
box covers in place during troubleshooting.
WARNING

3. Remove the negative (−) battery cable from the
generator set starting battery.

4-1

STATUS INDICATORS

Emergency Stop shutdown status (Code 102) can be
reset only at the PCC front panel.

Non-Automatic Status Indicator: This red lamp
flashes continuously when the Run/Off/Auto switch
is in the Off position.

Digital Display: This two-line, 16-character per line
alphanumeric display is used in the menu-driven
operating system and to show shutdown and warning messages. Refer to Tables 4-1 and 4-2.

Warning Status Indicator: This yellow lamp is lit
whenever the control detects a warning condition.
After the condition is corrected, warning indicators
can be reset by pressing the Reset switch. (It is not
necessary to stop the generator set.) In auto mode,
warning indicators can also be reset by cycling the
remote reset input after the condition is corrected.

RESETTING THE CONTROL
Press the momentary Reset Switch to reset warning and shutdown messages after the condition has
been corrected. To reset a shutdown message with
the Reset switch, the Run/Off/Auto switch must be
in the Off Position. (The control cannot go into
Standby (sleep) mode until all faults have been
reset.)
In Auto mode, warning indicators can also be reset
by cycling the remote reset input after the condition
is corrected. Shutdown faults can be reset by removing the remote start input and then cycling the
remote reset input.

Shutdown Status Indicator: This red lamp is lit
whenever the control detects a shutdown condition.
Shutdown faults are latched. After the condition is
corrected, shutdown indicators can be reset by
turning the Run/Off/Auto switch to the Off position,
and pressing the Reset switch. In the Auto position,
shutdown faults can be reset by removing the remote start input and then cycling the remote reset
input.

WARNING AND
SHUTDOWN
STATUS INDICATORS

RESET
SWITCH

FIGURE 4-1. CONTROL PANEL (PCC 3100)

4-2

ALPHANUMERIC
FAULT MESSAGE
DISPLAY

TABLE 4-1. WARNING AND SHUTDOWN CODES
BASIC

TROUBLE-

CODE . . . MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STATUS LED . . . . . . . . . CHECKS . . . SHOOTING
Blank . . . . LOAD DEMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . none . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
101 . . . . . . IDLE MODE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . none . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

102 . . . . . . EMERGENCY STOP . . . . . . . . . Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
200 . . . . . . LOW OIL PRESSURE . . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 . . . . . . . . 4-24
201 . . . . . . LOW OIL PRESSURE . . . . . . . . Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 . . . . . . . . 4-24
204 . . . . . . OIL PRES SENDER . . . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 . . . . . . . . 4-25
210 . . . . . . LOW COOLANT TEMP . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 . . . . . . . . 4-26
211 . . . . . . HIGH COOLANT TEMP . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 . . . . . . . . 4-27
212 . . . . . . HIGH COOLANT TEMP . . . . . . Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 . . . . . . . . 4-27
213 . . . . . . COOLANT SENDER . . . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 . . . . . . . . 4-25
214 . . . . . . LOW COOLANT LVL . . . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 . . . . . . . . 4-28
215 . . . . . . LOW COOLANT LVL . . . . . . . . . Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 . . . . . . . . 4-28
220 . . . . . . MAG PICKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 . . . . . . . . 4-29
221 . . . . . . FAIL TO CRANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 . . . . . . . . 4-15, 4-23
222 . . . . . . OVERCRANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 . . . . . . . . 4-21
223 . . . . . . OVERSPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 . . . . . . . . 4-30
224 . . . . . . FAIL TO SYNCHRONIZE . . . . . Warning/Shutdown . . . . . . . 4-8 . . . . . . . . 4-31
226 . . . . . . FAIL TO CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning/Shutdown . . . . . . . 4-8 . . . . . . . . 4-33
230 . . . . . . LOW DC VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 . . . . . . . . 4-35
231 . . . . . . HIGH DC VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 . . . . . . . . 4-35
232 . . . . . . WEAK BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 . . . . . . . . 4-35
240 . . . . . . LOW FUEL − DAY . . . . . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 . . . . . . . . 4-36
241 . . . . . . LOW FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 . . . . . . . . 4-37
250 . . . . . . EEPROM ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 . . . . . . . . 4-38
251 . . . . . . EEPROM ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 . . . . . . . . 4-38
252 . . . . . . EEPROM ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 . . . . . . . . 4-38

4-3

TABLE 4-1. WARNING AND SHUTDOWN CODES
BASIC

TROUBLE-

CODE . . . MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STATUS LED . . . . . . . . . CHECKS . . . SHOOTING
260 . . . . . . RACK POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning/Shutdown . . . . . . . 4-9 . . . . . . . . 4-39
261 . . . . . . GROUND FAULT* . . . . . . . . . . . Warning/Shutdown . . . . . . . 4-9/10 . . . . . 4-40
262 . . . . . . DAY TANK* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning/Shutdown . . . . . . . 4-9/10 . . . . . 4-40
263 . . . . . . HIGH GEN TEMP* . . . . . . . . . . . Warning/Shutdown . . . . . . . 4-9/10 . . . . . 4-40
270 . . . . . . PHASE ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 . . . . . . . 4-41
272 . . . . . . FIRST START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 . . . . . . . 4-43
301 . . . . . . HIGH AC VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 . . . . . . . 4-44
303 . . . . . . LOW AC VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 . . . . . . . 4-47
313 . . . . . . UNDER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 . . . . . . . 4-49
320 . . . . . . OVERCURRENT . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 . . . . . . . 4-50
321 . . . . . . OVERCURRENT . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 . . . . . . . 4-50
322 . . . . . . SHORT CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 . . . . . . . 4-50
330 . . . . . . OVERLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 . . . . . . . 4-50
335 . . . . . . REVERSE POWER . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 . . . . . . . 4-51
337 . . . . . . LOSS OF EXCITATION . . . . . . . Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 . . . . . . . 4-52
None . . . . INVALID SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
None . . . . INVALID CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

* Default message. Editable for customer site requirements. It is recommended that the bell alarm contacts of the
paralleling breaker be brought back to the control and indicate “Parallel CB Trip” as one customer fault.

4-4

TABLE 4-2. WARNING AND SHUTDOWN CODES
Hazards present in troubleshooting can cause equipment damage, severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Read Important Safety Instructions page and observe all instructions and precautions in this manual.
WARNING

SYMPTOM

CORRECTIVE ACTION

MESSAGE:
LOAD DEMAND

The PowerCommand control has received a signal to shut down from a
remote device. This is a normal operation mode, which is typically used in
automatic control system to minimize generator set operation hours and
system fuel consumption. When the load demand signal is removed, the
generator set will automatically start, synchronize, and close to the system bus.

MESSAGE:
IDLE MODE
101 − WARNING

Indicates that the engine is operating in idle mode. When the genset is operating in the RUN mode, grounding the engine idle input causes generator build-up to be inhibited and the engine to be governed at 800 RPM.
When ground is removed from this input, the genset returns to normal
speed and voltage.When the engine idle function is enabled, the control
automatically gensets lower oil pressure warning and shutdown trip
points to reflect the lower operating speed. When the engine idle function
is removed and the genset reverts to normal operating speed, the control
automatically resets oil pressure warning and shutdown trip points to the
normal settings.

Shutdown lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
EMERGENCY STOP
102 − SHUTDOWN

Indicates local or remote Emergency Stop.
To reset the local/remote Emergency Stop button:
Pull the button out (button with arrow − turn clockwise to allow it to pop
out).
Move the Run/Off/Auto switch to Off.
Press the Reset switch.
Select Run or Auto, as required.

Warning lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
LOW OIL PRESSURE
200 − WARNING

Indicates engine oil pressure has dropped to an unacceptable level. If generator is powering critical loads and cannot be shut down,
wait until next shutdown period and then follow 201-SHUTDOWN
procedure.
To check oil pressure, access the Oil Pressure menu prior to clearing the fault.

Shutdown lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
LOW OIL PRESSURE
201 − SHUTDOWN

Indicates engine oil pressure has dropped below the shutdown trip point.
Check oil level, lines and filters. If oil system is OK but oil level is low, replenish. Reset control and restart. Oil pressure limits are listed in Table
4-3.

Warning lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
OIL PRES SENDER
204 − WARNING

Indicates that the control has sensed that the engine oil pressure sender is
out of its working range. Check that the engine oil pressure sender is properly connected.

4-5

TABLE 4-2. WARNING AND SHUTDOWN CODES (CONT.)
WARNING Hazards present in troubleshooting can cause equipment damage, severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Read Important Safety Instructions page and observe all instructions and precautions in this manual.

SYMPTOM

CORRECTIVE ACTION

Warning lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
LOW COOLANT TEMP
210 − WARNING
Set is not operating. Warning occurs
when engine coolant temperature is
70 F (21 C) or lower.
NOTE: In applications where the
ambient temperature falls below
40F (4C), Low Coolant Temp
may be indicated even though the
coolant heaters are operating.

Indicates engine coolant heater is not operating or is not circulating coolant. Check for the following conditions:

Warning lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
HIGH COOLANT TEMP
211 − WARNING

Indicates the engine coolant temperature is getting close to the recommended maximum temperature limit:
215 F (102 C) − standby or 207 F (97 C) − prime.
If generator is powering non-critical and critical loads and cannot be shut
down, use the following:

a. Coolant heater not connected to power supply. Check for blown fuse
or disconnected heater cord and correct as required.
b. Check for low coolant level and replenish if required. Look for possible coolant leakage points and repair as required.
c. Open heater element. Check current draw of heater.

a. Reduce load if possible by turning off non-critical loads.
b. Check air inlets and outlets and remove any obstructions to airflow.
If engine can be stopped, follow HIGH COOLANT TEMP 212 − SHUTDOWN procedure.
To check coolant temperature, access the coolant temperature
menu prior to clearing the fault.
Shutdown lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
HIGH COOLANT TEMP
212 − SHUTDOWN

Indicates engine has overheated (coolant temperature has risen above
the shutdown trip point:
223 F (106 C) − standby or 215 F (102 C) − prime. Allow engine to
cool down completely before proceeding with the following checks:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Check for obstructions to cooling airflow and correct as necessary.
Check fan belt and repair or tighten if necessary.
Check coolant mixture.
Check blower fan and circulation pumps on remote radiator installations.
e. Reset control and restart after locating and correcting problem.

Warning lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
COOLANT SENDER
213 − WARNING

Indicates that the resistance of the coolant temperature sender is out of
range. Check the resistance of the sender. Resistance should be 500 to
2k ohms.

4-6

TABLE 4-2. WARNING AND SHUTDOWN CODES (CONT.)
WARNING Hazards present in troubleshooting can cause equipment damage, severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Read Important Safety Instructions page and observe all instructions and precautions in this manual.

SYMPTOM

CORRECTIVE ACTION

Shutdown lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
LOW COOLANT LVL
214 − WARNING
or
LOW COOLANT LVL
215 − SHUTDOWN

Indicates engine coolant level has fallen below the trip point. Allow engine
to cool down completely before proceeding.

Shutdown lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
MAG PICKUP
220 − SHUTDOWN

Indicates mag pickup speed indication is not being sensed or does not
match generator set output frequency.

Engine will not crank.
Shutdown lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
FAIL TO CRANK
221 − SHUTDOWN

Indicates possible fault with control or starting system. Check for the following conditions:

Shutdown lamp lights.
Engine stops cranking.
MESSAGE:
OVERCRANK
222 − SHUTDOWN

Indicates possible fuel system problem.

Engine runs and then shuts down.
Shutdown lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
OVERSPEED
223 − SHUTDOWN

Indicates engine has exceeded normal operating speed. (115% 1% of
nominal).

a. Check coolant level in both radiator and coolant recovery bottle and
replenish if low. Look for possible coolant leakage points and repair if
necessary.
b. If radiator level is low and coolant bottle level is correct, defective
coolant bottle hose or radiator cap.
c. Reset control and restart after locating and correcting problem.
LOW COOLANT LVL Shutdown will not occur if genset is in Idle
mode (low coolant warning only).

a. Restart and check RPM on the digital display.

a. Check fuse F3 on the Engine Interface board.
b. Poor battery cable connections. Clean the battery cable terminals
and tighten all connections.
c. Discharged or defective battery. Recharge or replace the battery.

a. Check for empty fuel tank, fuel leaks, or plugged fuel lines and correct as required.
b. Check for dirty fuel filter and replace if necessary.
c. Check for dirty or plugged air filter and replace if necessary.
d. Reset the control and restart after correcting the problem.

4-7

TABLE 4-2. WARNING AND SHUTDOWN CODES (CONT.)
WARNING Hazards present in troubleshooting can cause equipment damage, severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Read Important Safety Instructions page and observe all instructions and precautions in this manual.

SYMPTOM
Warning (or Shutdown)
lights.
MESSAGE:
FAIL TO SYNCHRONIZE
224 − WARNING
or
FAIL TO SYNCHRONIZE
224

CORRECTIVE ACTION
lamp

The generator set has not synchronized to the system bus within the allowable time frame.
a. Check the governor system stability. Adjust governing and synchronizer parameters as required.
b. Check for fuel system problems which can cause engine instability.
Synchronizing time can be improved by widening the synchronizing
window and reducing the acceptance time delay.

Warning lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
FAIL TO CLOSE
226 − SHUTDOWN

Indicates that the paralleling breaker has been given a signal to close, but
has not closed properly.

Warning lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
LOW DC VOLTAGE
230 − WARNING

Indicates battery voltage is below 10 VDC.

Warning lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
HIGH DC VOLTAGE
231 − WARNING

Indicates battery voltage exceeds 32 VDC.

a. Verify that the charging mechanism of the paralleling breaker is functioning properly.
b. Check the close signal to the breaker.
c. Verify that the auxiliary contact signals from the breaker to the PowerCommand control are operational.

a. Discharged or defective battery.
Check the battery charger fuse.
Recharge or replace the battery.
b. Poor battery cable connections. Clean the battery cable terminals
and tighten all connections.
c. Check engine DC alternator. Replace engine DC alternator if normal
battery charging voltage is not obtained.
d. Check battery charge voltage float level if applicable (raise float level).

Check voltage float level on battery charger if applicable (lower float level).
Check engine DC alternator. Replace engine DC alternator if normal battery charging voltage is not obtained.

Warning lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
WEAK BATTERY
232 − WARNING

Indicates battery voltage drops below 60% of nominal for two seconds,
during starting.
Discharged or defective battery.
See Warning message 230, LOW DC VOLTAGE.

4-8

TABLE 4-2. WARNING AND SHUTDOWN CODES (CONT.)
WARNING Hazards present in troubleshooting can cause equipment damage, severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Read Important Safety Instructions page and observe all instructions and precautions in this manual.

SYMPTOM

CORRECTIVE ACTION

Warning lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
LOW FUEL−DAY
240 − WARNING
or
LOW FUEL
241 − WARNING

Indicates day tank fuel supply is running low. Check fuel supply and replenish as required.

Shutdown lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
EEPROM ERROR
250 − SHUTDOWN

Indicates PCC memory error. Data corruption of critical operating parameters.

Warning lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
EEPROM ERROR
251 − WARNING
or
252 − WARNING

Indicates PCC memory error. Data corruption of noncritical operating parameters.

Shutdown lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
RACK POSITION
260 − WARNING

Indicates that one or both of the fuel racks is not at the commanded position.

Shutdown lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
GROUND FAULT
261 − SHUTDOWN
or
DAY TANK
262 − SHUTDOWN
or
HIGH GEN TEMP
263 − SHUTDOWN

When any one of these customer defined inputs is closed to ground, the
corresponding fault message is displayed. The nature of the fault is an optional customer selection. These fault functions can be programmed to
initiate a shutdown or a warning.

a. Check fuel pump connections.
b. Check left and right actuator fuses (A38-F1 & F2) on the governor
output module.

As indicated by the Shutdown lamp, a shutdown response has been preselected.
Note: Customer fault messages are editable. The message displayed for
the code shown (261 thru 263) may have been edited and may not appear
as shown in this table.

4-9

TABLE 4-2. WARNING AND SHUTDOWN CODES (CONT.)
WARNING Hazards present in troubleshooting can cause equipment damage, severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Read Important Safety Instructions page and observe all instructions and precautions in this manual.

SYMPTOM

CORRECTIVE ACTION

Warning lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
GROUND FAULT
261 − WARNING
or
DAY TANK
262 − WARNING
or
HIGH GEN TEMP
263 − WARNING

When any one of these customer defined inputs is closed to ground, the
corresponding fault message is displayed. The nature of the fault is an optional customer selection. These fault functions can be programmed to
initiate a shutdown or a warning.

Shutdown lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
PHASE ROTATION
270 − SHUTDOWN

The phase relationship between the generator set and the system bus is
not matched.

Shutdown lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
FIRST START
272 − WARNING

The PowerCommand control is not receiving a proper signal from the system master first start sensor. When this occurs, the control reverts to a fallback mode in which breaker closure is automatically allowed if bus is deenergized. If bus voltage is sensed, the control will force the generator set
to synchronize to the system bus before breaker close signal is initiated.

Shutdown lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
HIGH AC VOLTAGE
301 − SHUTDOWN

Indicates that one or more of the phase voltages has exceeded 130% of
nominal, or has exceeded 110% of nominal for 10 seconds.

Shutdown lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
LOW AC VOLTAGE
303 − SHUTDOWN

Indicates that one or more of the phase voltages has dropped below 85%
of nominal for 10 seconds.

Shutdown lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
UNDER FREQUENCY
313 − SHUTDOWN

Indicates that engine speed has dropped below 90% of nominal for 10
seconds.
Note: Five seconds before shutdown, a Load Dump signal is initiated.

As indicated by the Warning lamp, a warning response has been preselected.
Note: Customer fault messages are editable. The message displayed for
the code shown (261 thru 263) may have been edited and may not appear
as shown in this table.

a. Using a phase rotation checker, verify that the generator set phase
rotation matches the phase orientation of the system bus.
b. Verify that control wiring to the bus PT module on the PowerCommand control is properly connected.

Check fuel supply, intake air supply and load.

4-10

TABLE 4-2. WARNING AND SHUTDOWN CODES (CONT.)
WARNING Hazards present in troubleshooting can cause equipment damage, severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Read Important Safety Instructions page and observe all instructions and precautions in this manual.

SYMPTOM

CORRECTIVE ACTION

Warning lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
OVERCURRENT
320 − WARNING

Indicates that generator output current has exceeded 110% of rated for 60
seconds.

Shutdown lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
OVERCURRENT
321 − SHUTDOWN

Indicates that generator output current has exceeded 110% of rated, and
that a PCC time/current calculation has initiated an overcurrent shutdown.

Shutdown lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
SHORT CIRCUIT
322 − SHUTDOWN

Indicates that generator output current has exceeded 175% of rated.

Warning lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
OVERLOAD
330 − WARNING

Indicates that three-phase power output exceeds 105% of standby (or
115% of prime) rating. After five seconds, the Load Dump output is activated. After 60 seconds, the OVERLOAD warning is activated.

Shutdown lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
REVERSE POWER
335 − SHUTDOWN

Indicates that power is flowing into the generator set, rather than out from
the unit. This can be caused by engine failure, or inability to carry load, or
by a number of control or interconnection problems.

Check load and load lead connections.

Check load and load lead connections.

Check load and load lead connections.

Check load and load lead connections.

a. If problem occurs at initial startup, verify connection of generator set
CT’s, by applying load to the generator set while it is operating alone
while connected to bus.
b. Verify proper connection of load sharing lines.
c. Verify that the generator set is operating at the correct frequency and
voltage. The no-load voltage of the generator set and other generator sets should all be the same.

4-11

TABLE 4-2. WARNING AND SHUTDOWN CODES (CONT.)
WARNING Hazards present in troubleshooting can cause equipment damage, severe personal
injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Read Important Safety Instructions page and observe all instructions and precautions in this manual.

SYMPTOM
Shutdown lamp lights.
MESSAGE:
LOSS OF EXCITATION
337 − SHUTDOWN

CORRECTIVE ACTION
Indicates that the alternator excitation system is improperly adjusted or has
failed. Loss of Excitation failure may also be caused by operation of filters
and power factor correction capacitors in the generator set loads when the
kW load level on the genset is low. The capacitors in the filters and power
factor correction equipment can present a leading power factor load to the
generator set, which (correctly) shuts down the generator set through the
loss of excitation fault. Leading power factor loads can cause the generator
set to lose control of the output voltage of the genset and can cause kVar
load sharing problems. Therefore, it is necessary to protect the genset from
excessive leading power factor and reverse Var conditions.
a. Start the generator set in the RUN mode and check output voltage
with both the control digital meter set and a calibrated meter. Calibrate voltage if necessary. Output voltage should be adjusted to the
same level as all other generator sets at no load. Make adjustments
as necessary to correct.
b. Check load sharing lines for proper interconnections.
c. See Section 6 of this manual “Servicing the Generator”, Exciter Rectifier, and exciter Rotor.

MESSAGE:
INVALID SETUP

Indicates that the digital board is not properly calibrated for the generator
set model. Refer to Digital Board (A32) Calibration in Section 5.

MESSAGE:
INVALID CAL

Indicates that the digital board is not properly calibrated for the generator
set model. Refer to Digital Board (A32) Calibration in Section 5.

TABLE 4-3. PCC OIL PRESSURE WARNING & SHUTDOWN LIMITS
QST30 Engine: NORM 45-65 psi (310-448 kPa), IDLE 20 psi (138 kPa)
35 psi
40 psi
10 psi
15 psi

(241 kPa)
(276 kPa)
(69 kPa)
(103 kPa)

shutdown limit - run mode value
warning limit - run mode value
shutdown limit - idle mode value
warning limit- idle mode value

To check oil pressure or engine temperature during a warning, access the oil pressure or
coolant temperature menu prior to clearing the fault.

4-12

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE

following troubleshooting procedures. Connector,
LED and switch locations for each circuit board and
module are provided in Section 3. The control wiring
and circuit board connections are shown in Section
9.

The following tables are a guide to help you evaluate problems with the generator set. You can save
time if you read through the manual ahead of time
and understand the system.

CAUTION Always set the Run/Off/Auto (S12)
switch to the Off position and the Power On/
Standby (S5) switch to the Standby position before disconnecting or connecting harness connectors. Otherwise, disconnecting the harness
connectors can result in voltage spikes high
enough to damage the DC control circuits of the
genset.

To determine the appropriate troubleshooting
procedure for the specific problem at hand, be
sure to refer to the “Indicators” column provided in each troubleshooting table.
Try to think through the problem. Go over what was
done during the last service call. The problem could
be as simple as a loose wire, an opened fuse or a
tripped circuit breaker. (Table 4-38 describes the
location and function of each fuse.)

Electrostatic discharge will damage
circuit boards. Always wear a grounding wrist
strap when handling circuit boards or socketmounted IC’s and when disconnecting or connecting harness connectors.
CAUTION

Figure 4-2 shows the location of the components
within the control panel that are referenced in the

4-13

S5 POWER ON/
STANDBY SWITCH

DIGITAL BOARD
A32
DISPLAY BOARD
A35
ANALOG BOARD
A33

ENGINE INTERFACE
A31

CUSTOMER INTERFACE
A34

RUN/OFF/AUTO
SWITCH S12

OPTIONAL RTD
RELAY

OPTIONAL
COMMON ALARM
RELAY K14

OPTIONAL RUN
RELAYS K11, K12 &
K13

TB1-1 THROUGH 60

OPTIONAL
THERMISTOR
RELAY 160/140 C

VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
OUTPUT MODULE
A37

BUS PT MODULE
A39

PT/CT BOARD A36
GOVERNOR
OUTPUT MODULE
A38
ACCESSORY BOX
(A40)

FIGURE 4-2. CIRCUIT BOARD LOCATIONS

4-14

TABLE 4-4. ENGINE DOES NOT CRANK—LOCAL OR REMOTE RUN
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

“FAIL TO
CRANK”
(221)
message

1. Insufficient battery voltage. Check the
following conditions:
a. Batteries not charged.
b. Battery connections loose or
dirty.
c. Insufficient battery charging voltage.
d. Engine DC alternator could be
bad.

1a. Recharge or replace the battery. Specific gravity for a fully charged battery is approximately
1.260 at 80 F (27 C).
1b. Clean and tighten or replace the battery cable
connectors and cables at the battery and the
set.
1c. Adjust charge rate of battery charging circuit.
1d. Replace engine DC alternator if normal battery
charging voltage is not obtained.

Reset and
attempt to
start:
Start LED
DS11 on the
engine
interface board
turns on.
NOTE:
These two
indications
suggest that
the PCC has
received a
start signal
and has sent a
start command
to the start
output (J4-2)
on the engine
interface
board.

2. Starter could be bad.

2. Reset the control. Attempt to start, and test for
B+ at the starter. If there is B+ at the starter, the
starter could be bad. Test starter (see engine
service manual). Replace the starter.

3. If there is no B+ at the starter, start solenoid K4 could be bad.

3. Reset the control. Attempt to start, and test for
B+ into and out of start solenoid contacts. If
there is B+ in, but not out, check for B+ at the
start solenoid coil. If there is B+ at the coil,
check ground connection. If ground connection
is good, the start solenoid is bad. Replace the
start solenoid.
If there is B+ into and out of the start solenoid
contacts, check for an open between the start
solenoid contacts and the starter. If there is no
B+, go to the next step.

4. If there is no B+ at the start solenoid
coil (K4), the backup start disconnect
contacts in the regulator output module (A37) could be open (indicating
that A37 is bad).

*4. Disconnect J7/P7 at the regulator output module. Test for continuity at A37 J7-5/J7-6. If there
is no continuity, the regulator output module is
bad. Replace A37.

5. If there is continuity at A37 J7-5/J7-6,
there may be an open between A37
and A31, an open between A37 and
K4, or A31 may be bad.

*5. If there is continuity at A37 J7-5/J7-6, reset the
control, attempt to start, and check for B+ at
A37 P7-5.
If there is B+ at P7-5, there may be an open between start solenoid coil (K4) and A37. If there
is no B+ at P7-5, check for B+ at J4-2 on the engine interface board (A31) while attempting to
start.
If there is B+ at A31 J4-2, check for an open between A37 and A31.
If there is no B+ at A31 J4-2, (and DS11 is on)
the engine interface board is bad. Replace A31.

6. The mag pickup signal is not being
sensed.

6. Refer to the mag pickup shutdown message
(220).

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-15

TABLE 4-5. ENGINE DOES NOT CRANK—LOCAL OR REMOTE RUN
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

“FAIL TO
CRANK”
(221)
message

1. Fuse F3 on the engine interface board
(A31) may be open, or B+ may not be
getting to F3.

*1. Install harness tool between A31 J4/P4. Reset
the control. Attempt to start and check for B+ at
J4-2. If no B+, remove F3 and check continuity.
If open, replace the fuse with one of the same
type and amp rating (5 Amps). If F3 is OK,
check the B+ supply from the wiring harness.

2. Emergency Stop switch S13 or the
PCC door harness may be bad.

2. To isolate:
 Check for B+ at S13-1 and S13-2.
If there is B+ at S13-2, but not at S13-1
(and S13 is NOT in the emergency stop
position), then S13 is bad. Replace S13.
 If there is no B+ at S13-2, disconnect
J3/P3, and check for B+ at A31 J3-2. If
there is no B+, replace A31.
 If there is B+ at A31 J3-2, check continuity
from P3-2 to P3-6. If no continuity, repair
or replace as necessary.

Reset and
attempt to
start:
Start LED
DS11 on the
engine
interface board
does NOT
turn on.
NOTE:
These two
indications
suggest that
the PCC has
received a
start signal
and has NOT
sent a start
command to
the start output
(J4-2) on the
engine
interface
board.

3. Digital board (A32) may be bad.

*3. Install harness tool between A32 J4/P4. Reset
the control. Attempt to start, and test for ground
output at A32 J4-3. If there is no ground output,
A32 is bad. Replace A32.

4. Engine interface board (A31) may be
bad.

*4. If there is a ground output at A32 J4-3, and yet
there is no B+ output at A31 J4-2; then A31 is
bad. Replace A31.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-16

TABLE 4-6. ENGINE DOES NOT CRANK—REMOTE RUN
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

“FAIL TO
CRANK”
(221)
message
DOES NOT
appear on
digital display
−and:
Auto LED DS5
on the engine
interface board
(A31) is on −
RMT Start
LED DS14 on
the customer
interface board
(A34) is on −

1. The Auto mode signal is not getting
from engine interface board A31 to
digital board A32, indicating that A31 is
bad.

*1. Install harness tool between A32 J4/P4. Check
for ground output at A32 J4-18.
If there is no ground output (but A31 DS5 is on)
engine interface board A31 is bad. Replace
A31.
If there is a ground output at A31 J1-18, proceed to the next step.

2. The Remote run signal is not getting
from customer interface board A34 to
A32, indicating that A34 is bad.

*2. Install harness tool between A32 J4/P4. Reset
the control. Attempt to remote start, and check
for ground output at A32 J2-26. If no ground output (but A34 DS14 is on) customer interface
board A34 is bad. Replace A34.
If there is a ground output at A32 J2-26, proceed to the next step.

3. Digital board (A32) may be bad.

*3. If, when attempting remote start, there is a
ground input at A32 J2-26, and a ground input
at A32 J4-18—and there is no “FAIL TO
CRANK” message—and the set does not
crank; A32 is bad. Replace, A32.

NOTE:
This condition
suggests that
the PCC
processor
(digital board
−A32) has
NOT received
or recognized
a remote start
start signal.

Corrective Action

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-17

TABLE 4-7. ENGINE DOES NOT CRANK—REMOTE RUN
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)
“FAIL TO
CRANK”
(221)
message
DOES NOT
appear on
digital display
−and:
Auto LED DS5
on the engine
interface board
(A31) is off −
RMT Start
LED DS14 on
the customer
interface board
(A34) is on −
NOTE:
This condition
suggests that
the engine
interface board
(A31) is NOT
enabling the
remote start
logic on the
digital board.

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

The Auto mode input is not getting from the
Auto select switch (S12) to engine interface
board A31 (indicating that S12, A31, or the
harness is bad.
1. S12 or the wiring harness may be bad.

*1. Disconnect A31 J3/P3. Check continuity to
ground at A31 J3-11. (J3-11 is ground out to
S12. If ground is not present, replace A31. If
ground is present, place S12 in Auto and check
continuity from P3-11 to P3-13. If no continuity,
isolate to switch or wiring harness. Repair as
necessary. If there is continuity, A31 may be
bad. Reconnect J3/P3.

2. Engine interface board A31 may be
bad.

*2. Install harness tool between A32 J4/P4. Check
the 16 volt (nominal) supply at A32 J4-16.
If the voltage is present at A32 J4-16, and
ground is present at A31 P3-13—and yet A31
DS5 is off; then A31 is bad. Replace A31.

3. Digital board A32 may be bad.

3. If there is no +16 volt supply voltage at A32
J4-16, A32 is bad. Replace A32.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-18

TABLE 4-8. ENGINE DOES NOT CRANK—REMOTE RUN
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)
“FAIL TO
CRANK”
(221)
message
DOES NOT
appear on
digital display
−and:
Auto LED DS5
on the engine
interface board
(A31) is on −
RMT Start
LED DS14 on
the customer
interface board
(A34) is off

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

The remote start input is not getting from the
remote start switch to the output of the customer interface board (A34) (indicating that
the switch, A34, or the harness is bad.
1. The remote start switch or the
wiring harness may be bad.

*1. Install harness tool between A34 J1/P1. Reset
the control. Attempt remote start and check for
ground at A34 J1-13. If ground level is not present, isolate to the switch or the wiring harness
by checking for a start signal at TB1-5. Repair
as necessary.

2. Customer interface board A34
may be bad.

2. If ground is present at A34 J1-13—and yet A34
DS14 is off, replace A34.

NOTE:
This condition
suggests that
the remote
start input is
NOT passing
through the
customer
interface board
(A34) to
enable the
remote start
logic on the
digital board.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-19

TABLE 4-9. ENGINE DOES NOT CRANK—LOCAL RUN
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

“FAIL TO
The start input is not getting from the Run/
CRANK”
Off/ Auto select switch (S12) to A31 (indi(221)
cating that S12, A31, or the harness is bad.
message
DOES NOT
appear on
1. Run/Off/ Auto select switch S12 or the
digital display
wiring harness may be bad.
−and:
Run LED DS4
on the engine
interface board
(A31) is off−
NOTE:
This condition
suggests that
the start input
is NOT getting
from the
Run/Off/ Auto
switch (S12) to
the engine
interface board
(A31) to
enable the
remote start
logic on the
digital board.

2. Engine interface board A31
may be bad.

*1. Check continuity to ground at A31 J3-11. If
ground is not present, replace A31. If ground is
present, place S12 in Run and check continuity
from P3-11 to P3-12. If no continuity, isolate to
switch or wiring harness. Repair as necessary.
If there is continuity, A31 may be bad.

*2. Install harness tool between A32 J4/P4. Check
the 16 volt (nominal) supply at A32 J4-16.
If the voltage is present at A32 J4-16, and
ground is present at A31 J3-12—and yet A31
DS5 is off, replace A31.

3. Digital board A32 may be bad.

3. If there is no +16 volt supply voltage at A32
J4-16, replace A32.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-20

TABLE 4-10. ENGINE CRANKS BUT DOES NOT START
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)
“OVERCRANK”
(222)
message
−and
While cranking,
Run LED DS12
on the
engine interface
board (A31)
is on.

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

Fuel supply or fuel delivery.
1. Restricted fuel supply due to:
a. Fuel level below pickup tube in
tank.
b. Closed shutoff valve in supply
line.
c. Fuel injectors clogged.
d. Air in fuel system.

1a. Add fuel if low. Prime the fuel system.
1b. Open any closed shutoff valve in the fuel line
supplying the engine.
1c. Refer to engine service manual.
1d. Bleed air from fuel system. Refer to engine service manual.

2. The mechanical fuel linkage could be
binding, loose, or damaged.

2. Inspect the mechanical fuel linkage, and repair
or replace as necessary.
Follow the procedure in the engine repair
manual to check the EFC for binding or damage.
Disconnect the actuator connector, and connect +12 VDC from the battery to the actuator.
The actuator should click upon application and
removal of the voltage.
If the actuator does not click, refer to the engine
manual.
If the actuator clicks, reconnect the wires to the
actuator.

3. Fuel solenoid (K1) on the injection
pump not energized due to:
a. Open in fuel solenoid circuit or
defective governor module.
b. Defective fuel solenoid.

3a. Reset the control. Attempt to start and check for
B+ at the K1 fuel solenoid coil on the injection
pump and at output of governor module. Check
continuity from J6-20 and 21 to J6-19.
3b. Check wiring continuity of fuel solenoid circuit.
Test fuel solenoid.
Repair or replace as necessary.

4. Fuel tank solenoid not energized due
to:
a. Open in fuel tank solenoid circuit.
b. Defective fuel tank solenoid.

4a. Check wiring continuity of fuel tank solenoid circuit.
4b. Test fuel tank solenoid.
Repair or replace as necessary.

and
While cranking,
Run LED DS2
on the
governor output
module (A38)
is on.
NOTE:
These
indications
suggest that the
PCC has sent a
run signal to the
fuel solenoid.

5. Engine fuel injection or other engine
problem.

5. Refer to the engine service manual.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-21

TABLE 4-11. ENGINE CRANKS BUT DOES NOT START
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

“OVERCRANK” The run signal is not getting through the
governor module to the fuel solenoid.
(222)
message
1. The run signal is not getting out of the
−and
engine interface board (A31). A31
may be bad.
While cranking,
Run LED DS12
2. There is an open between the engine
on the
interface board (A31) and the goverengine interface
nor output module (A38).
board (A31)
is on.
and
While cranking,
Run LED DS2
on the
governor output
module (A38)
is off.

3. The run signal is not getting through
the governor output module (A38).
A38 may be bad.

Reset the control. Attempt to start and check for B+
at A31 J4-1.
*1. Install harness tool between A31 J4/P4. Reset
the control. Attempt to start and check for B+ at
A31 J4-1. If there is no B+ at A31 J4-1, replace
A31.
*2. If there is B+ at A31 J4-1, install harness tool between A38 J6/P6. Check for B+ at
A38 J6-19, while attempting to crank. If there is
no B+ at A38 J6-19, isolate to connectors and
wiring. Repair or replace as necessary.
3. If there is B+ at A31 J4-1, and there is B+ at A38
J6-19, check continuity from A38 J6-15 to battery ground, if not continuity replace harness, if
continuity, replace A38.

NOTE:
These
indications
suggest that the
PCC has sent a
run signal to the
governor
module, but the
signal is not
getting through
the governor
module to the
fuel solenoid.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-22

TABLE 4-12. ENGINE CRANKS BUT DOES NOT START
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

“OVERCRANK” The run signal from the digital board (A32)
(222)
is not being processed by the engine intermessage
face board (A31).

*Install harness tool between A32 J4/P4. Attempt to
start and check for ground signal at A32 J4−8.

−and
Run LED DS12
on the
engine interface
board (A31)
is off.

NOTE:
These
indications
suggest that the
PCC has NOT
sent a run
signal −
(fuel solenoid
enable signal)
out to the
governor
module and the
fuel solenoid.

“FAIL TO
CRANK”
(221)
message

1. The run signal is not getting out of the
digital board (A32). A32 may be bad.

1. If there is no ground signal at A32 J4−8, replace
A32.

2. The run signal is not being processed
by the engine interface board (A31).
A31 may be bad.

2. If there is a ground signal at A32 J4−8, replace
A31.

The mag pickup signal is not being
sensed.

Refer to the mag pickup shutdown message
(220).

NOTE:
The engine is
cranking but
shutting down
on a 221 fault.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-23

TABLE 4-13. LOW OIL PRESSURE WARNING (200) OR SHUTDOWN (201)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

“LOW OIL
PRESSURE”
warning
(200) or
shutdown
(201)
message.

1. Low oil level. Clogged lines or filters.

1. Check oil level, lines and filters. If oil system is
OK but oil level is low, replenish. Oil pressure
limits are listed in Table 4-3.

2a. Sender or oil pump could be bad. Or
the generator set may be shutting
down on another fault.

2. Disconnect the oil pressure sender leads, and
connect an oil pressure sender simulator to the
harness.
a. If the control responds to the simulator, reconnect the sender, disconnect the run signal wire
at the fuel solenoid, and crank the engine.
Check the oil pressure reading on the digital
display.
 If the display shows an acceptable oil pressure, the problem may not be in the oil or oil
sensing system. The generator set may
be shutting down on another fault (out of
fuel, blown governor fuse, intermittent
connector). Restart the generator set and
monitor the PCC display panel for other
faults.
 If the display does not show an acceptable
oil pressure, replace the sender. If the
PCC still doesn’t display an oil pressure
while cranking, the oil pump may be faulty.
Refer to the engine service manual.

2b. Harness or PCC circuit board could be
bad.
Isolate to the harness, engine interface board (A31), analog board (A33),
or digital board (A32).

*b. If the control does not respond to the simulator,
the PCC or the harness is bad. Install harness
tool between A31 J2/P2.
Check for +5 VDC at the sender (lead marked
E1-B). If there is no 5 VDC at the sender
 Check for 5 VDC at A31 J5-18.
 If yes, harness is bad. If no, check for 5
VDC at A31 J2-24.
 If yes, A31 is bad. If no, A33 is bad.
If there is 5 VDC at the sender, use the sender
simulator to generate a signal to A31 J2-23. If
the pressure signal (.5 to 4.5 VDC) does not get
to A31 J2-23, isolate to the harness or A31. If
the pressure signal does get to A31 J2-23, refer
to the analog/digital troubleshooting procedure
(Table 4-36a/b).

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-24

TABLE 4-14. SENDER WARNINGS (204 or 213)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

“OIL
PRESSURE
SENDER”
warning
(204)
message.

1. The sender connections could be bad.

“COOLANT
SENDER”
warning
(213)
message.

1. The sender connections could be bad.

2. The sender, the harness, engine interface board (A31), digital board (A32),
or analog board (A33) could be faulty.

2. The sender, the harness, engine interface board (A31), digital board (A32),
or analog board (A33) could be faulty.

1. Check the sender connections.

*2. Isolate to the sender, harness, engine interface
board (A31), analog board (A33), or digital
board (A32).
Disconnect the oil pressure sender leads, and
connect an oil pressure sender simulator to the
harness.
“OIL PRES SENDER” warning is displayed
after the fault condition is sensed for 10 seconds.
a. If the control responds to the simulator, replace the sender.
*b. If the control does not respond to the simulator,
the PCC or the harness is bad. Install harness
tool between A31 J2/P2.
Check for +5 VDC at the sender (lead marked
E1-B). If there is no 5 VDC at the sender
 Check for 5 VDC at A31 J5-18.
 If yes, harness is bad. If no, check for 5
VDC at A31 J2-24.
 If yes, A31 is bad. If no, A33 is bad.
If there is 5 VDC at the sender, use the sender
simulator to generate a signal to A31 J2-23. If
the pressure signal (.5 to 4.5 VDC) does not get
to A31 J2-23, isolate to the harness or A31. If
the pressure signal does get to A31 J2-23, refer
to the analog/digital troubleshooting procedure
(Table 4-36a/b).

1. Check the sender connections.
*2. Isolate to the sender, harness, engine interface
board (A31), analog board (A33), or digital
board (A32).
Disconnect the sender, and plug in a resistive
sender simulator to isolate the fault.
a. If the control responds to the simulator, replace the sender.
b. If the control does not respond to the simulator, refer to the high coolant temp troubleshooting procedure.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-25

TABLE 4-15. LOW ENGINE TEMPERATURE WARNING (210)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)
“LOW
COOLANT
TEMP”
warning
(210)
message.

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

DS3 / A31 is on, indicating that engine interface board A31 is receiving a low coolant temp from the sender.
The sender, the harness or A31 could be
bad.

Isolate the source of the signal.
Unplug the coolant temperature switch (S1) and reset the control.
1. If the 210 warning message drops out and does
not reappear, replace the sender.
*2. If the 210 warning message reappears and remains after control reset, disconnect A31 J4
and check continuity from P4−13 to GND.
 If there is continuity, replace the harness.
 If there is no continuity, replace circuit
board A31.

DS3 / A31 is off, indicating that engine interface board A31 is not receiving a low engine temp signal from the sender—but the
210 message indicates that A32, the digital
board, is responding to a false low engine
temp signal.
A31, the engine interface board, or A32,
the digital board, could be bad.

Isolate the source of the signal.
Check J4−6/P4−6 on A32.
*1. Install harness tool between A32 J4/P4.
2. Open J4−6 and reset the control.
 If fault drops out and does not return, replace A31.
 If fault returns after resetting the control,
replace A32.

Coolant level
is normal.
Heater is OK.
Coolant temp
on front panel
display is OK.
DS3 on the
engine
interface
board, A31,
is on.

“LOW
COOLANT
TEMP”
warning
(210)
message.
Coolant level
is normal.
Heater is OK.
Coolant temp
on front panel
display is OK.
DS3 on the
engine
interface
board, A31,
is off.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-26

TABLE 4-16. HIGH ENGINE TEMPERATURE WARNING (211) OR SHUTDOWN (212)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

“HIGH
COOLANT
TEMP”
warning
(211) or
shutdown
(212)
message.

1. Engine problem:
 Coolant pump could be faulty.
 Thermostat could be faulty.
 There could be an obstruction in
the coolant flow.
 External coolant pump (with remote radiator) could be faulty.
 External radiator fan motor (with
remote radiator) could be faulty.
2. The generator set may have been
overloaded.
3. Sender, harness or PCC circuit board
could be bad.

Coolant
mixture and
level is normal.
No airflow
obstructions.

Corrective Action

Fan belt is OK.

1. Refer to the engine service manual if there are
any physical indications of overheating.
2. Correct any overload condition.
3. If there are no physical indications of overheating, check to see if the PCC accurately displays
ambient engine temperature.
 If the PCC ambient coolant temperature
reading is accurate, the engine may be
overheating. Refer to the engine service
manual.
 If the PCC ambient coolant temperature
reading is not accurate, isolate to the
sender, harness, engine interface board
(A31), analog board, or digital board.
Disconnect the coolant temperature sender
leads, and connect an coolant temperature
sender simulator to the harness.
a. If the control responds to the simulator, replace the sender.
*b. If the control does not respond to the simulator, install harness tool between A31
J5/P5. Connect the coolant temperature
sender simulator (and B+) to A31 J5.
 If the control displays the correct simulated
temperature, replace the harness.
 If the control does not display the correct
simulated temperature, install harness
tool at A31 J2/P2, and open lines 18/19
(and 14/15, if applicable). Check for continuity between A31 J2-18 to 19 (for coolant
temp L), and A31 J2-14 to 15 (for coolant
temp R).
 If no continuity, then A31 is bad.
 If continuity is OK, then send a simulated temperature signal and measure the voltage out of A31 (A31
J2-18 to 19, and A31 J2-14 to 15).
If voltage is not OK (refer to the analog board inputs and outputs, Table
4-37), replace A33.
If voltage is OK, refer to the analog/
digital troubleshooting procedure
(Table 4-36a/b).

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-27

TABLE 4-17. LOW COOLANT WARNING OR SHUTDOWN (214 / 215)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)
“LOW
COOLANT
LVL” warning
(214) or
shutdown
(215) message

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

DS2 on A31 is on, indicating that A31 is receiving a low coolant signal from the sender.
The sender, the harness or the A31 circuit
board could be bad.

If the coolant level is normal, isolate the source of the
low coolant signal. (This is a ground signal.)
Disconnect the signal lead at the sender and reset
the control.
1. If the 215 shutdown message drops out and
does not reappear, replace the sender.
*2. If the 215 shutdown message reappears and
remains after control reset, disconnect J4/A31
and check continuity from P4−7 to GND.
 If there is continuity, replace the harness.
 If there is no continuity, replace circuit
board A31.

DS2 on A31 is off, indicating that A31 is not
receiving a low coolant signal from the
sender—but the 215 message indicates
that A32, the digital board, is responding to
a false low coolant signal.
A31, the engine interface board, or A32, the
digital board, could be bad.

If the coolant level is normal, isolate the source of the
low coolant signal.
Check J4−4/P4−4 on A32.
*1. Install harness tool between A32 J4/P4.
2. Open the J4-4 circuit and reset the control.
 If the fault drops out and does not return,
replace A31.
 If the fault returns after resetting the control, replace A32.

Coolant level
is normal.
DS2 on the
engine
interface
board, A31,
is on.

“LOW
COOLANT
LVL” warning
(214) or
shutdown
(215) message
Coolant level
is normal.
DS2 on the
engine
interface
board, A31,
is off.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-28

TABLE 4-18. MAG PICKUP SHUTDOWN (220)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)
“MAG
PICKUP”
shutdown
message (220)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

This indicates that the PCC is not sensing
the mag pickup signal, or the mag pickup
frequency does not correspond (in proportion) to the genset output frequency.
1. The PCC may not be set for the correct
generator set.
2. Loose or damaged mag pickup wire.

3. Damaged mag pickup (MPU).

4. The harness, the engine interface
board (A31), the analog board (A33) or
the digital board (A32) could be bad.

1. Check and correct setting if necessary.

2. Inspect the wires, and repair or replace as necessary.

*3/4 To isolate the problem, reset the control and attempt to start the set in idle mode.
a. If the engine displays a “FAIL TO CRANK” shutdown message, or if the engine starts and idles,
but then shuts down on a MAG PICKUP fault,
the MPU sender could be bad. Remove the
MPU connectors and check for 3.5 to 15 VAC at
the MPU while cranking.
 If no output, check for damage or debris.
Also check for improper adjustment of the
MPU. (Refer to Section 5.) If there is still
no output, replace the MPU sender.
 If the MPU output is OK, install harness
tool between A32 J4/P4. Check for MPU
voltage at A32 J4-10 to 11, while cranking.
If OK, replace A32. If not OK, use continuity checks to isolate to A31 or harness.
b. If the engine starts and idles, and does not display a fault, then there could be a frequency
mismatch problem.
 Measure generator output frequency with
a digital multimeter and compare to the frequency on the PCC display.
 If they do match, multiply the frequency by
30 and compare this number to the RPM
on the PCC display. If these are not the
same, the MPU sender may be bad. Replace the MPU sender
 If the multimeter and PCC frequencies do
not match, there is a frequency sensing
problem. Verify the accuracy of the PCC
L1N voltage, and then refer to the analog/
digital troubleshooting procedure (Table
4-36a/b).

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-29

TABLE 4-19. OVERSPEED SHUTDOWN (223)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

“OVERSPEED”
shutdown
message (223)

1. The mechanical fuel linkage could be
binding, loose, or damaged.

1. Inspect the mechanical fuel linkage, and repair
or replace as necessary.
 Follow the procedure in the engine repair
manual to check the EFC for binding or
damage.
 Disconnect the actuator connector, and
connect +12 VDC from the battery to the
actuator. The actuator should click upon
application and removal of the voltage.
If the actuator does not click, refer to the
engine manual.
If the actuator clicks, reconnect the wires
to the actuator.

2. The governor output module (A38) or
the digital board (A32) could be bad.

*2. Reset the control, and start the set while monitoring the PCC duty cycle display.
 If the duty cycle goes high (above 40%) and the
set shuts down on overspeed, replace A32.
 If the duty cycle goes to zero and the set shuts
down on overspeed, replace A38.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-30

TABLE 4-20a. FAIL TO SYNCHRONIZE (224)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

“FAIL TO
SYNCHRONIZE” warning
(224) or
shutdown
(224)
message.

1. Improper adjustment of bus or generator set voltage.

1. Verify that the bus voltage is within plus or minus 5% of the value which is programmed into
the PowerCommand control, and verify that the
generator set is operating at proper voltage and
frequency. Verify that the bus PT module is
properly calibrated. (Refer to Digital Bus Voltage Calibration in Section 5). Check the FAIL
TO SYNCHRONIZE time delay. It should be set
for approximately 120 seconds. Check paralleling setup adjustments, particularly PERM WIN PHASE and PERM WIN - TIME. They are typically adjusted to 20 degrees and 0.5 seconds.

2. Generator set hunting due to improper
synchronizing adjustments.

2. Check synchronizer adjustments in the PowerCommand control set−up. If you are unsure of
proper adjustment procedure, returning the unit
to it’s default values should result in proper operation. The default values are shown in the test
report which is shipped with the generator set.
In particular, check values for paralleling functions, governing and voltage regulation.

3. Unstable or hunting generator set due
to governor component failure or misadjustment.

3. Inspect generator set governing system for evidence of binding or sticking linkages or other
components which are not operating correctly.
Verify that water jacket heaters are operational
and properly functioning. Check and adjust
governor settings as required.

Continued On Next Page...

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-31

TABLE 4-20b. FAIL TO SYNCHRONIZE (224) (Continued)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

“FAIL TO
SYNCHRONIZE” warning
(224) or
shutdown
(224)
message.

4. Unstable or hunting generator set due
to air entrained in the fuel system.

4. This problem is indicated in situations where
the generator set performs properly after the
generator set is up and running with load, but
experiences ”FAIL TO SYNCHRONIZE” alarms
after it has been shut down for several days.
Check the generator set fuel system for leaks or
cracks. If fuel filters have recently been
changed, air may be trapped in the fuel filter
heads. Check to be sure that there is a fuel head
on the engine fuel pump. Check fuel line routing
for overhead loops which could result in the
trapping of air in the system if the system sits
idle for some period of time. Parallel systems
should use option C174, the fuel pump feature
option. This feature is available as an aftermarket accessory kit.
Note: The generator set will synchronize
faster as the synchronize acceptance window is widened (i.e., the value in the PERM
WIN−PHASE is increased) and as the acceptance time is minimized (the value in the
PERM WIN−TIME is minimized). Caution
should be taken in utility (mains) paralleling
applications to avoid damage to the generator set by inappropriate setting of these parameters.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-32

TABLE 4-21a. FAIL TO CLOSE (226)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

“FAIL TO
CLOSE”
warning (226)
or shutdown
(226)
message.

1. Check the paralleling breaker for indication that the breaker is tripped and
locked out from a signal issued from
it’s internal trip unit

1. If the breaker has tripped due to operation of it’s
internal trip unit, the alternator and electrical
distribution system connected to the alternator
should be carefully inspected for evidence of
burning or tracking, which might indicate that an
electrical fault has occurred. If no evidence of a
fault is found, reset the trip unit and verify that
the trip settings of the breaker are appropriate
for the application. Reset the fault on the PowerCommand control and check the system operation to verify that the failure to close fault
problem has been eliminated.

2. Breaker charge circuit is not operating
properly. (Power circuit breakers only.)

2. Check the circuit breaker status indicators and
verify that the breaker status indicates that the
breaker is properly charged. If it is, go on to step
3. If it is not charged, check the charge circuit for
proper operation. Switch the PowerCommand
control RUN/OFF/AUTO switch to OFF and
then manually recharge the paralleling breaker
according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Switch the PowerCommand control RUN/OFF/
AUTO switch back to RUN. The generator set
should start and accelerate to rated speed and
voltage and the operator should be able to
manually control the circuit breaker from the
pushbuttons on the front panel of the PowerCommand control. In most cases the breaker
should automatically recharge on closing to the
system bus. If this does not occur, problem may
be in the control wiring to the breaker, or the
control power source.

Continued On Next Page...

NOTE: Some breakers are not able to be set
up to charge on closing (they will recharge
on opening). If this is the case with your
installation, it is critical that the generator
set be allowed to operate for a cooldown period which is long enough for the breaker to
completely charge before the generator set
is shut down. If the generator set is shut
down on a fault condition, the breaker may
require manual recharge before the system
can be put back into automatic operation.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-33

TABLE 4-21b. FAIL TO CLOSE (226) (Continued)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

“FAIL TO
CLOSE”
warning (226)
or shutdown
(226)
message.

3. Breaker close signal has been issued
from the PowerCommand control, but
has not reached the breaker.

3. Disconnect breaker control wiring and verify
that the control is sending a close signal to the
breaker. If the breaker signal is present at the
generator set control, reconnect the control wiring at the set, verify that it is present at the
breaker terminals.
Note that in Onan paralleling systems, DC power for operation of the relay comes from the generator control. Verify that the 20 amp customer
B+ fuse (F1 − engine harness assembly) is OK
and that the pilot relay operates properly.

4. Breaker status (open/close) signals
are not properly connected to the PowerCommand control, or are not operating properly.

4. Verify that the breaker auxiliary contact wiring is
properly connected to the generator set. Verify
that the breaker is sending proper condition signals to the generator set, by disconnecting the
control wiring at the breaker and verifying that
the breaker auxiliary contacts change state
when breaker condition changes. If they are
functioning properly, verify that the signals are
reaching the generator set by reconnecting the
wiring and the breaker and checking for condition change at the generator set control accessory box.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-34

TABLE 4-22. DC (BATTERY) WARNINGS (230, 231, 232)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)
“LOW DC
VOLTAGE”
(230) or
“WEAK
BATTERY”
(232),
warning
message.

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

1. Weak or discharged battery.

1. Recharge or replace the battery. Specific gravity for a fully charged battery is approximately
1.260 at 80 F (27 C).

2. Low electrolyte level in battery.

2. Replenish electrolyte and recharge battery.

3. Battery connections loose or dirty.

3. Clean and tighten or replace the battery cable
connectors and cables at the battery and the
set.

4. Insufficient battery charging voltage.
5. Engine DC alternator could be bad.
6. If the batteries are OK, the problem
may be the harness, the engine interface board (A31), the digital board
(A32), or the analog board (A33).

“HIGH DC
VOLTAGE”
(231)
warning
message.
But battery
voltage is OK.

4. Adjust charge rate of battery charging circuit,
according to manufacturers instructions.
5. Replace engine DC alternator if normal battery
charging voltage is not obtained.
*6. If the battery voltage, electrolyte, and connections are OK, check the battery voltage at A31
J5-17. If the voltage is not OK (same as battery
voltage), disconnect J5 and isolate to the harness or A31.
If the voltage is OK, check battery voltage at
A33 J1-31. If the voltage is not OK, replace
A31. If the voltage at A33 J1-31 is OK, isolate to
A33 or A32 using the analog input troubleshooting procedure (Table 4-36a/b).

1. Excessive battery charging voltage.

1. Adjust charge rate of battery charging circuit according to manufacturers instructions.

2. Engine DC alternator could be bad.

2. Replace engne DC alternator if normal battery
charging voltage is not obtained.
*3. Check the battery voltage at A31 J5-17. If the
voltage is not OK (same as battery voltage), disconnect J5 and isolate to the harness or A31.
If the voltage is OK, check battery voltage at
A33 J1-31. If the voltage is not OK, replace
A31. If the voltage at A33 J1-31 is OK, isolate to
A33 or A32 using the analog input troubleshooting procedure (Table 4-36a/b).

3. If the battery voltage is OK, the problem may be the engine interface board
(A31), the digital board (A32), or the
analog board (A33).

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-35

TABLE 4-23. LOW FUEL −DAY WARNING (240)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)
“LOW FUEL−
DAY”
warning
message (240)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

DS1 on A31 is on, indicating that A31 is receiving a low fuel signal from the sender.
The sender, the harness or the A31 circuit
board could be bad.

If the fuel level is normal, isolate the source of the low
fuel signal.
Disconnect the signal lead at the sender and reset
the control.
1. If the 240 message drops out and does not reappear, replace the sender.
*2. If the 240 message reappears and remains after control reset, disconnect J4/A31 and check
continuity from P4−14 to GND.
 If there is continuity, replace the harness.
 If there is no continuity, replace circuit
board A31.

DS1 on A31 is off, indicating that the PCC is
not receiving a low fuel signal from the
sender—but the 240 message indicates
that A32, the digital board, is responding to
a false low fuel signal.
A31, the engine interface board, or A32, the
digital board, could be bad.

If the fuel level is normal, isolate the source of the low
fuel signal.
*1. Install a breakout connector at A32 J4.
2. Open the J4-15 circuit and reset the control.
 If the fault drops out and does not return,
replace A31.
 If the fault returns after resetting the control, go to step 3.
3. Install harness tool between A32 J2/P2.
4. Open the J2-19 circuit and reset the control.
 If the fault drops out and does not return,
replace A31.
 If the fault returns after resetting the control, replace A32..

Fuel level is
normal.
DS1 on the
engine
interface
board, A31,
is on.
“LOW FUEL−
DAY”
warning
message (240)
Fuel level is
normal.
DS1 (A31)
and DS13
(A34) are off.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-36

TABLE 4-24. LOW FUEL WARNING (241)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)
“LOW FUEL”
warning
message (241)
Fuel level is
normal.

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

DS13 on A34 is on, indicating that A34 is receiving a low fuel signal from the customer
circuit.
If there is no actual fault, the problem may
be a short to ground in the external wiring or
a bad customer interface board (A34).

If the fuel level is normal, isolate the source of the low
fuel signal.
Disconnect the signal lead near the control and reset
the control.
1. If the 241 message drops out and does not reappear, there is a short to ground in the external
wiring or a faulty sender.
*2. If the 241 message reappears and remains after control reset, disconnect J1/A34 and check
continuity from P1−5 to GND.
 If there is continuity, find and repair a short
to ground in the external wiring.
 If there is no continuity, replace circuit
board A34.

DS13 on A34 is off, indicating that the PCC
is not receiving a low fuel signal from the
sender—but the 241 message indicates
that A32, the digital board, is responding to
a false low fuel signal.
A34, the customer interface board, or A32,
the digital board, could be bad.

If the fuel level is normal, isolate the source of the low
fuel signal.
*1. Install harness tool between A32 J2/P2.
2. Open the J2-19 circuit and reset the control.
 If the fault drops out and does not return,
replace A34.
 If the fault returns after resetting the control, replace A32.

DS13 on the
customer
interface
board, A34, is
on.

“LOW FUEL”
warning
message (241)
Fuel level is
normal.
DS13 (A34) is
off.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-37

TABLE 4-25. EEPROM ERROR SHUTDOWN (250) OR WARNING (251, 252)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

“EEPROM
ERROR”
shutdown
(250)
message.

The EE memory on the digital board (A32)
may be bad.

1. Perform the initial start setup procedure.
Turn the Run/Off/Auto switch to Off and reset
the control. Simultaneously press the RESET,
MENU, and PHASE SELECT keys to start the
setup.
Select the correct values, save your choices,
and attempt to start the set.
2. If the set shuts down on the same EEPROM
ERROR message, replace the digital board
(A32).

“EEPROM
ERROR”
warning
(251)
message.

The EE memory on the digital board (A32)
may be bad.

1. Perform the adjustment procedures (described
in Section 5). Save the adjustments.
Reset the control. Shut off and restart the set.
2. If the control generates the same EEPROM
ERROR message, perform the calibration procedures in Section 5.
Reset the control. Shut off and restart the set.
3. If the control generates the same EEPROM
ERROR message, replace the digital board
(A32).

“EEPROM
ERROR”
warning
(252)
message.

The EE memory on the digital board (A32)
may be bad.

1. If this message occurred during an adjustment,
option selection, or calibration of the PCC,
verify the values or choices selected and repeat
the save operation.
Reset the control. Shut off and restart the set.
2. If the control generates the same EEPROM
ERROR message, replace the digital board
(A32).

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-38

TABLE 4-26. RACK POSITION WARNING (260)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)
“RACK
POSITION”
warning
message (260)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

PowerCommand control fault or defective
governor control circuitry.

Restart the generator set and monitor the fault LED’s
of the governor output module (A38). Refer to Section 3 for LED descriptions.
1 LED’s (DS1 through DS4 are on and DS5 and
DS6 are off) do not indicate a fault, refer to “Customer Fault 261, 262 & 263 for corrective action.
2 LED’s (DS5 or DS6 are on) one or more indicate
a fault and the generator set shuts down after
restarting − perform the Rack Position Fault/
Test Procedure at the end of this section.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-39

TABLE 4-27. CUSTOMER FAULTS (261, 262 or 263)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)
“CUSTOMER
FAULT
(261, 262 or
263) message.
And
corresponding
LED on
customer
interface board
A34 is on.

“CUSTOMER
FAULT
(261, 262 or
263) message.
And
corresponding
LED on
customer
interface board
A34 is off.

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

If the corresponding LED on the customer
interface board (A34) is on, then A34 is receiving a signal from the customer circuit.
If there is no actual fault, the problem may
be a short to ground in the external wiring or
a bad customer interface board (A34).

Isolate the source of the false signal.
Disconnect the signal lead near the control and reset
the control.
1. If the message drops out, there is a short to
ground in the external wiring.
2. If the message remains, replace A34.

If the corresponding LED on the customer Isolate the source of the false signal.
interface board (A34) is off, then A34 is not Check J2/P2 on A32.
receiving a signal from the customer circuit.
*1. Install harness tool between A32 J2/P2.
The message indicates that A32, the digital
2. Open the appropriate circuit J2-3, J2-24, J2-9,
board, is responding to a false signal.
or J2-15 and reset the control.
A34, the customer interface board, or A32,
 If the fault does not return, replace A34.
the digital board, could be bad.
 If the fault reappears, replace A32.

A 34
LED

A32
CONNECTOR

CUSTOMER
FAULT #

FAULT
CODE

DS4
DS11
DS15
DS3

J2-3
J2-24
J2-9
J2-15

Rack Position
2
3
4

260
261
262
263

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-40

TABLE 4-28a. PHASE ROTATION (270)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

“PHASE
ROTATION”
shutdown
(270)
message.

1. Single phase bus condition.

1. Verify that bus voltage is proper and is not single
phased.

2. Generator set output power feeders
are improperly connected.

2. Verify phase rotation of the generator set output
relative to the system bus. Correct wiring of
power output conductors if required. The phase
relationship between the generator set and the
system bus can be checked by either using a
phase rotation checker, or by using synchronizing lamps or two voltmeters. The procedure for
using voltmeters for checking phase relationship is as follows:
Energize the system bus and start the generator set in question in the RUN mode, but do not
close the paralleling breaker. Connect each
voltmeter from the line to load side of a single
phase of the paralleling breaker (see Figure
8-1). If the generator set and bus have the same
phase rotation, the voltmeters should rise and
fall in voltage at the same time. If they are not in
phase, one will rise while the other falls.

Continued On Next Page...

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-41

TABLE 4-28b. PHASE ROTATION (270) (Continued)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

“PHASE
ROTATION”
shutdown
(270)
message.

3. Wiring to bus PT module is not correct.

3. If power conductors are properly phased, check
the phase rotation of the wiring to the generator
set CT/PT module (A36) and Bus PT module
(A39). This is done using voltmeters connected
as shown in Figure 8-1. Energize the system
bus and start the generator set being tested in
the RUN mode. Operate the display screen on
the PowerCommand control to show the digital
synchroscope (bus frequency). Observe the
voltmeter(s) and the synchronized indicator (*)
on the PowerCommand screen. When the voltage of the meter(s) approaches zero, the *
should be displayed. If the * is on when the voltmeters are reading their highest value, the Bus
PT module or the genset CT/PT module is incorrectly wired. If incorrect wiring is indicated,
switch off the power supply to the system bus
and manually close the paralleling breaker by
pushing the breaker close switch on the front of
the PowerCommand control. Check the voltage
between phase L1 of the generator CT/PT module (J9-4 yellow) and phase L1 of the Bus PT
module (terminal TB1-1 on the module). If there
is voltage difference between these points, reverse the wiring between TB1-1 and TB1-3 on
the Bus PT module. Retest the system to be
certain that the phase relationship problem has
been corrected. If no voltage difference is
sensed at the input to the CT/PT module and
Bus PT module, the problem could be in the wiring between the Bus PT module and the PowerCommand control. Reverse the connections
between terminals TB2-1, 2 with TB2-5, 6. Retest the system to make sure that the phase
relationship problem has been corrected.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-42

TABLE 4-29. FIRST START (272)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

“FIRST
START”
warning (272)
message.

1. Master First Start Sensor has failed.

1. Verify that the Master First Start Sensor is properly functioning. This can be accomplished by
connecting a DC voltmeter from ground to the
appropriate terminal on the Master First Start
Sensor to the PowerCommand Control. The
voltmeter should indicate a pulsing voltage
present on the terminal.

2. Interconnection between Master First
Start Sensor and the PowerCommand
control has failed.

2. Verify that the voltage pulse is present at the
PowerCommand Control (terminal TB1−50).
Check and repair any problems in the interconnection wiring between the generator set and
the Master First Start Sensor.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-43

TABLE 4-30a. HIGH AC VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN (301)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

“HIGH AC
VOLTAGE ”
shutdown
(301)
message.

1. The problem may be in the PCC, the
alternator, or the interconnection between them.
Note 1: The PCC may indicate either
a low AC Voltage or High AC Voltage
shutdown due to the design of the
logic in the control.
You must first determine if the output voltage the control sees is low
or high.
Note 2: Residual voltage is normally
5 to 10% of nominal output voltage.
For example, a genset with a 480
volt output, will have a residual voltage of 25 to 50 VAC at normal operating speed.
2. The problem may be the regulator
module (A37), the engine interface
board (A31), or the digital board (A32).

1. Set the display on the PCC to GEN, VOLTS,
L-N.
a. Start the genset and observe the voltage
displayed on the digital display.
b. If all phases of voltage are balanced and not
zero, but lower than normal, the alternator
and the input to the PCC are OK. The problem is in the excitation circuit for the alternator. Go to step 2.
c. If one or more phases of voltage are high or
the voltages are unbalanced, the PCC is not
measuring all phases of voltage and is responding to the low “average” of the three
phases of voltage. Go to step 3.

2. With DC power to the PCC and with the set not
running, check A31 DS9, the AVR duty cycle
LED. this LED should be off. If it si on, go to step
2d.
Isolate the genset output from the load. Disconnect A37 J10, and place the set in Idle mode. In
Idle mode the excitation circuit is disabled. Start
the set and monitor the AC output voltage with a
digital multimeter.
a. If output voltage is greater than residual (5%
of normal output), go to step 3.
b. If output voltage stays at 0 (or residual), and
DS2 on A37 is off, go to step 4.
c. If output voltage stays at 0 (or residual), and
DS2 on A37 is on, look at DS9 on A31.
If DS9 on A31 is off, replace A37.
d. If DS9 on A31 is on, connect a breakout connector at A32 J4, and open J4-2.
If DS9 goes out, replace A32.
If DS9 stays on replace A31.

(Continued)

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-44

TABLE 4-30b. HIGH AC VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN (301) (Continued)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)
“HIGH AC
VOLTAGE ”
shutdown
(301)
message.

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

3. The problem may be the PT/CT module (A36) or the interconnecting wiring
to the PT/CT module.
NOTE: To calculate the “expected A36
output” voltage range, do the following:
Determine the ratio between the measured voltage and the expected voltage. The output (18 VAC) of the PT/CT
module will also be reduced by this ratio.

*3. Before starting the generator set, disconnect the harness connector from the PT/CT
module (A36) and connect the harness tool
between A36 and its harness connector.
Check the output voltage at the alternator
output terminals and record the voltages.
a. If the voltages are not balanced, go to step 5.
b. If the voltages are balanced, calculate the
expected output voltage from the PT/C module (see Note to the left). Measure and record the outputs from A36 J8 pins 6−5, 4−3,
and 2−1.
If the output voltage is proportional to the
alternator output voltage the A36 module
is OK. Go on to step 4.
If the voltages are not balanced, replace
A36.

4. The problem may be in the customer
interface board (A34) or the interconnecting wiring.

*4. Disconnect the plugs in the following steps
below with the set off then start the set in the
idle mode, and measure voltages with a digital multimeter.
a. Disconnect J3/P3 (blue) and insert the harness tool. Check the voltage into the customer interface board with the harness tool
at J3 terminals 4−6, 5−13, and 7−20. Remove the harness tool and reconnect J3 and
P3. These voltages should be the same values measured in step 3b.
If the voltages are balanced, continue in this
step. If the voltages are unbalanced, repair
the harness between the A36 module and
the A34 board.
b. Disconnect J5/P5 on the customer interface
board and insert the harness tool. Check the
voltage out of the customer interface board
at J5 terminals 24−28, 26−28, and 30−28.
These voltages should be the same values
measured in step 3b.
If the voltages are balanced, go to step 5. If
the voltages are unbalanced, replace the
customer interface board.

(Continued)

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-45

TABLE 4-30c. HIGH AC VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN (301) (Continued)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)
“HIGH AC
VOLTAGE ”
shutdown
(301)
message.

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

5. The problem may be the analog board
(A33).
NOTE: To determine the “3-phase
ave” signal voltage range for Step 3b,
use the following formula:

*5. Using the harness tool, check the “3-phase
ave” signal at A33 J2-18.
If the voltage is within the expected range,
replace A32. If the voltage is not within the
expected range, replace A33. See Note.

Vout 3-phase ave = Vin (2.9PT) 5%
Vin = Actual generator output voltage
(phase-to-neutral)
PT = PT primary (120, 240 or 346)

6. The problem may be in the generator
set itself.

6. Refer to the generator servicing procedures in
Section 6.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-46

TABLE 4-31a. LOW AC VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN (303)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

“LOW AC
VOLTAGE ”
shutdown
(303)
message.

1. PMG or field wiring could be faulty.

1. If output voltage is low and both A37/DS2 and
A31/DS10 are on, check and repair the PMG or
field wiring.
2. Check each diode according to Servicing the
Generator in Section 6. Service as necessary.
3. Check the load and correct any overload.
4. Check connectors J8 and J9 on A36, J3 and J5
on A34, and J7 on A37.
*5. Isolate the genset output from the load. Reset
the control, restart the set, and measure AC
output voltage with a multimeter.
a. If output voltage is high, refer to the troubleshooting section for High AC Voltage Shutdown
(301).
If output voltage is normal, the problem must be
in the voltage sensing circuitry (A32 or A33).
Isolate, using the analog input troubleshooting
procedure (Table 4-36a/b). Check the phase
that shows a low voltage on the PCC display.
*b. If output voltage is low, the control cannot drive
the output voltage high enough. The problem
could be A37, A31, or A32. Restart the set and
monitor isolated B+ supply LED A37/DS1,
output duty cycle LED A37/DS2, and
AVR duty cycle LED A31/DS10.
 If A37/DS1 is not on, disconnect A3 J7/P7
and check for B+ at P7-1. (Control must be in
Run mode for B+ reading.)
 If B+ is OK to A37, replace A37.
 If A37/DS1 is on, check A31/DS10 (with the
set running).
 If A31/DS10 is not on with set running, check
for continuity: A31 J1-2 to J4-10 and A31
J1-1 to J4-11 (270 ohms). If no continuity, replace A31.
 If A31is OK, replace A32.
 If A31/DS10 is on with set running and
A37/DS2 is not on, check the harness.
 If the harness is OK, replace A37.

2. The rotating rectifier assembly (diodes
CR1 through CR6) is faulty.
3. Overload.
4. There may be a loose connector in the
control loop.

5a. The problem may be the analog board
(A33) or the digital board (A32).

5b. The problem may be the regulator
module (A37), the engine interface
board (A31), or the digital board (A32).

(Continued)

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-47

TABLE 4-31b. LOW AC VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN (303) (Continued)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)
“LOW AC
VOLTAGE ”
shutdown
(303)
message.

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

5c. The problem may be the PT/CT module (A36), the analog board (A33), the
customer interface board (A34), or the
digital board (A32).

c. If the measured AC voltage is high, the control
must have lost AC sensing. Check PTs (primary
1K−2.5K ohms; secondary 140−225 ohms),
sensing harness wires, generator output connections, and the customer interface board for
continuity. If these are OK, then check the analog and digital boards, using the analog input
troubleshooting procedure (Table 4-36a/b).

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-48

TABLE 4-32. UNDER FREQUENCY SHUTDOWN (313)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)
“UNDER
FREQUENCY”
shutdown
(313)
message.

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

1. Improper setup.

1. Check Initial Setup (set size) and correct, if necessary.

2. Overload.

2. Check the load and correct any overload, if necessary.
Disconnect the load. Reset the control and attempt to restart the generator set.

3. Fuel or air delivery problem.

3. If the engine starts and runs, refer to the engine
fuel/air delivery service procedures.

4. The governor output module (A38),
the digital board (A32), or the engine
interface board (A31) could be bad.

*4. Disconnect the wire to the fuel solenoid, reset
the control, and crank the set. DS2 on the governor output module A38 should light.
If the duty cycle LED (DS1) on the governor output module (A38) slowly becomes bright, the
governor output module(A38), the digital board
(A32), and the engine interface board (A31) are
functioning properly.
If DS1 does not light or instantly becomes
bright, A31, A32 or A38 may be bad.
A38 - Crank the set, and check the governor duty cycle on the PCC display. If the
duty cycle is OK (60% max), replace governor output module (A38).
If the duty cycle is not OK, the digital board
(A32) or the engine interface board (A31)
may be bad.
 A31 - Check for continuity: A31 J1-13 to
A31 J4-19 and A31 J1-14 to A31 J4-12. If
no continuity, replace A31.
 A32 - If A31 is OK, replace A32

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-49

TABLE 4-33. OVERCURRENT WARNING (320) OR SHUTDOWN (321),
SHORT CIRCUIT SHUTDOWN (322), OR OVERLOAD WARNING (330)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)
“OVERCURRENT”
warning (320)
or shutdown
(321),
or
“SHORT
CIRCUIT”
shutdown
(322), or
OVERLOAD
warning (330)
message.

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

1. Short or Overload.

1. Check the load and load cables. Repair if necessary.

2. Incorrect CTs or CT connections.

2. Check CTs and CT connections. Correct if necessary. Refer to Current Transfer Installation in
Section 5.
3. Disconnect the PT/CT module and check the
3-ohm resistors (J8-15 to 14, J8-22 to 23,
J8-7 to 8). Replace the module if necessary.

3. The problem may be a bad PT/CT
module (A36).

4. The problem may be the customer interface board (A34) or connections.

*4. Check continuity from A36—through A34—to
A33. Repair the connection or replace A34 if
necessary. Refer to Section 9 for pin reference.

5. The problem may be the analog board
(A33) or the digital board (A32).

5. Isolate, using the analog input troubleshooting
procedure (Table 4-36a/b). Check the bad
phase or phases.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-50

TABLE 4-34. REVERSE POWER (335)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

“REVERSE
POWER”
shutdown
(335)
message.

1. If this shutdown condition occurs when
a non-paralleled generator set is
loaded, it indicates that the generator
set output CT’s or PT’s are incorrectly
installed.

1. Verify proper CT orientation, wiring and connections on the control system. Refer to Current
Transformer (CT) Installation in Section 5.
Make sure that the no load frequency matches
the bus frequency. Check metering calibration
for both generator set and bus.

2. Verify that the generator set is operating at the correct frequency and voltage. The bus voltage and frequency
should be the same as the no-load
generator set frequency and voltage.

2. Make adjustments as required for proper operation.

3. The load sharing line connections and
orientation must be correctly accomplished for proper load sharing.

3. Verify that load sharing connections are made
as noted in the drawings and that there are no
damaged or disconnected wires.

4. If the alarm occurs when a large load is
added or shed, dissimilar transient response of the generator sets in the
system may cause the reverse power
condition.

4. Apply various load steps to each generator set
in the system, noting the voltage and frequency
dips/surges and recovery times. The generator
sets should be adjusted so that transient load
performance is approximately the same in all
machines in the system.

5. Reverse power alarm can also indicate that the generator set is unable to
carry load properly.

5. Verify that the generator set can pick up and
carry loads properly, up to the rated capacity of
the machine. Inability to carry load can be related to engine misadjustments, component
failures, or poor fuel quality. Check governing
system for binding or sticking. Check fuel filters
and fuel lines for cracks, leaks or dents. Check
air cleaner(s) for obstructions.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-51

TABLE 4-35. LOSS OF EXCITATION (337)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

Corrective Action

“LOSS OF
EXCITATION”
shutdown
(337)
message.

1. Improper voltage adjustment of the
generator set relative to the system
bus.

1. Verify that the no load voltage of the generator
set matches the bus voltage. Check generator
set metering calibration for both generator set
and bus readings. If no problems are found,
check the paralleling adjustments in the PowerCommand control, to see if they match the default settings in the generator set test report.

2. Load sharing line mis-connection or
damage.

2. Verify load sharing line connections and condition. Make corrections as required.

3. If condition occurs when the generator
set is lightly loaded, leading power factor loads may cause this condition.

3. Loss of Excitation failure may also be caused by
operation of filters and power factor correction
capacitors in the generator set loads when the
kW load level on the genset is low. The capacitors in the filters and power factor correction
equipment can present a leading power factor
load to the generator set, which (correctly)
shuts down the generator set through the loss
of excitation fault. Leading power factor loads
can cause the generator set to lose control of
the output voltage of the genset, and can cause
kVar load sharing problems, so it is necessary
to protect the genset from excessive leading
power factor and reverse var conditions.
For generator sets prior to the release of
version 2.0 firmware:
Check the load for devices which may apply
leading power factor loads to the generator set.
These include power factor correction capacitors, input filter and some non-linear load devices with internal voltage waveform correction
provisions. These devices may need to be disconnected from the bus until other loads are
added to the system.
For generator sets with version 2.0 and
higher firmware:
If there is a loss of excitation fault that cannot be
explained by genset component failures or misadjustments, perform the following steps:

(Continued)

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-52

TABLE 4-35. LOSS OF EXCITATION (337) (Continued)
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

Indicator(s)

Possible Cause

“LOSS OF
EXCITATION”
shutdown
(337)
message.

3. (continued)

Corrective Action
a. Start the generator set and apply system
loads in their normal operation sequence.
Observe the output voltage, power factor,
and % voltage regulation of the generator
set as the loads are applied. (This may
take more than one test.)
b. If the voltage does not rise and the % voltage regulation is greater than 0 as the system loads are applied, extend the time
delay on loss of excitation shutdown and
repeat the load addition test.
c. If the increase in time delay does not resolve the shutdown condition, contact the
factory for the maximum permissible setting of the loss of excitation shutdown set
points.
d. If the voltage rises or the % voltage regulation value drops to 0 and does not rise as
load is applied, investigate means to remove leading power factor loads from the
genset bus.

4. The generator set may be incapable of
carrying full reactive load due to component failures.

4. See section 6 of this manual, “Servicing the
Generator, Exciter Rectifier and Exciter Rotor”.
See also repair and diagnosis process for ”Low
AC Voltage” in this section.

5. If transient conditions result in this
alarm condition, the PowerCommand
control internal set points may need
adjustment.

5. Consult factory.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-53

TABLE 4-36a. TROUBLESHOOTING ANALOG SIGNALS BETWEEN ANALOG AND DIGITAL
BOARDS
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

NOTE: Perform this procedure after you have isolated the problem to either the analog
board (A33) or to the digital board (A32). You must have schematics and wiring
diagrams to identify the various inputs and outputs.

*1. Check that the input to the analog board is correct. There are a few signals (e.g.: 3PH Ave, Line Freq,
Phase Angle 1 to 3, Lead Lag) that are derived from one or more input signals.
1a. To check the sensor input voltages into the analog board, connect the sender simulator and test the
voltage across the + and − inputs at A33 J1 using harness tool. (This assumes that you have verified
that the harness and the engine interface board is good.)
 If the input voltage to the analog board is correct (refer to Table 4-36), go to step 2.
 If the input voltage to the analog board is incorrect, check for 12 VDC at A32 J3-20 and 5 VDC at
A32 J3-12. Do this with the analog board connected to the digital (A32).
If the 12 VDC and 5 VDC voltages are OK, replace the analog board.
If the 12 VDC and 5 VDC voltages are not OK, disconnect A32 J3 and recheck for 12 VDC at
A32 J3-20 and 5 VDC at A32 J3-12.
If the 12 VDC and 5 VDC voltages are now OK, replace the analog board.
If the 12 VDC and 5 VDC voltages are still not OK, replace the digital board.
1b. To check the AC inputs into the analog board, drive the PT/CT inputs (voltage or current) and verify
that the input is correct.
 If the input to the analog board is correct, go to step 2.
 If the input to the analog board is incorrect, disconnect the ribbon cable at A34 J5 and check the voltage at A34 J5 again (Customer Interface).
If the voltage is now correct, replace the analog board.
If the voltage is still not correct, the problem is not on the analog or digital boards.
2. If the input to the analog board is correct, determine whether the signal is multiplexed (refer to Table
4-36). If the signal is not multiplexed, go to step 2a. If the signal is multiplexed, go to step 2b.
2a. This step is for non-multiplexed AC signals. Drive the input to the analog board with an AC source,
and test the signal level out of the analog board. You must calculate what the analog output voltage
should be (Table 4-36), assuming the analog board transfer function is linear.
 If the signal level into the digital board is correct, the problem must be on the digital board. Replace
the digital board.
 If the signal level into the digital board is incorrect, remove the ribbon cable connector at A32 J3, and
check the front panel digital display of the bad analog value.
If the display reads 0, replace the analog board.
If the display reads a value other than 0, replace the digital board.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-54

TABLE 4-36b. TROUBLESHOOTING ANALOG SIGNALS BETWEEN ANALOG AND
DIGITAL BOARDS
WARNING Many troubleshooting procedures present hazards that can result in severe personal injury or death. Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and
machinery hazards should perform service procedures. Review Important Safety Instructions page.

NOTE: Perform this procedure after you have isolated the problem to either the analog
board (A33) or to the digital board (A32). You must have schematics and wiring
diagrams to identify the various inputs and outputs.
2b. This step is for multiplexed signals. Is more than one multiplexed signal reading bad?
 No. If the input to the analog board is correct and only one multiplexed signal is reading bad, replace
the analog board.
 Yes. If more than one multiplexed signal reading is bad, remove the ribbon cable connector at
A32 J3 and check the front panel digital display of the bad inputs. It should read 0 for all inputs except the temperature inputs (which should read less than 32 F or less than 0 C) and power factor
(which should read “NA”).
If any values read incorrectly, replace the digital board.
If they all read correctly, measure voltages on the multiplexer control lines (with A32-J3 disconnected, measure from Digital board connector J3). Voltages should be:
A32-J3-23:
A32-J3-24:
A32-J3-27:
A32-J3-33:
A32-J3-34:

3.0 0.25 VDC
2.4 0.25 VDC
1.4 0.25 VDC
3.0 0.25 VDC
3.0 0.25 VDC

If these control (select) line voltages are not correct, replace the digital board.
If these control (select) line voltages are correct (and the input to the analog board is correct),
reconnect the ribbon cable connector (through harness tool) at A32 J3 and check the 5 VDC
reference at A32 J3-12 and the 12 VDC supply at A32 J3-20.
If the 5 VDC and the 12 VDC voltages are OK, replace the analog board.
If the 5 VDC and the 12 VDC voltages are not OK, disconnect A32 J3 and check the
voltages again (measured from Digital board side).
If the 5 VDC and the 12 VDC voltages are OK with A32 J3 disconnected, replace the
analog board.
If the 5 VDC and the 12 VDC voltages are not OK with A32 J3 disconnected, replace
the digital board.

*CAUTION: Wearing wrist strap, set S12 to Off and A32 S5 to Standby before connecting/disconnecting harness plugs.

4-55

TABLE 4−37. ANALOG CIRCUIT BOARD (A33) INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
Input Name

Input
Connection

Input Signal
Range

L1 (0 to nominal)

J4-24 to J4-28

0 to 18 VAC

L2 (0 to nominal)

J4-26 to J4-28

L3 (0 to nominal)

J4-37 to J4-28

Output Name1

Output
Connection2

Output
Signal Range

L10 (ACH1)

J2-4

0 to 3.0 VDC

0 to 18 VAC

L20 (ACH2)

J2-13

0 to 3.0 VDC

0 to 18 VAC

L30 (ACH3)

J2-1

0 to 3.0 VDC

3PH ave (ACH0)

J2-18

0 to 2.9 VDC

Line freq. (HSI.1)

J2-21

0-5V sq wave @ L1 Hz

CT21 (0 to full load)

J4-33 to J4-34

0 to 1.65 VAC

C1 fltrd (ACH4)

J2-3

0 to 1.0 VDC

CT22 (0 to full load)

J4-32 to J4-34

0 to 1.65 VAC

C2 fltrd (ACH5)

J2-9

0 to 1.0 VDC

CT23 (0 to full load)

J4-31 to J4-34

0 to 1.65 VAC

C3 fltrd (ACH6)

J2-17

0 to 1.0 VDC

C1 (ACH7)

J2-7

0 to 1.0 VDC

C2 (ACH7)

J2-7

0 to 1.0 VDC

C3 (ACH7)

J2-7

0 to 1.0 VDC

(1 to 0.8 pf)

Phase angle 1 (ACH7)3

J2-7

0 to 1.0 VDC

(1 to 0.8 pf)

Phase angle 2 (ACH7)3

J2-7

0 to 1.0 VDC

(1 to 0.8 pf)

Phase angle 3

(ACH7)3

J2-7

0 to 1.0 VDC

(L1 vs CT21)

Lead lag (P2A.1)) 3

J2-29

0 or 5 VDC (digital)

Bus L1 (0 to nominal) 6

J4-15 to J4-18

0 to 18 VAC

Bus L1 (ACH7)

J2-7

0 to 3.0 VDC

Bus L2 (0 to nominal) 6

J4-16 to J4-18

0 to 18 VAC

Bus L2 (ACH7)

J2-7

0 to 3.0 VDC

Bus L3 (0 to nominal) 6

J4-17 to J4-18

0 to 18 VAC

Bus L3 (ACH7)

J2-7

0 to 3.0 VDC

Bus freq (HS1.3)

J2-22

0-5V sq wave @ Bus L1 Hz

J2-26

0 or 5 VDC (digital)

J2-7

0 to 5.0 VDC

Bus/gen phase (HS1.2)5

J2-19

0-5V 120 Hz 0 to 100% DC

Synch (ACH7)5

J2-7

Battery voltage (ACH7)

J2-7

0 to 2.9 VDC

Phase rot (P2A.0)5
Bus/gen phase dif

Battery voltage

(ACH7)5

J1-31 (+) to J1-30(−)

0 to 32 VDC

(See note 4 )

0.5 to 4.5 VDC

Oil press (ACH7)

J2-7

0.5 to 4.5 VDC

H2O 1 (6 to 230 F)

J1-19/20 to J1-17/18

700 to 1800 

H2O 1 (ACH7)

J2-7

1.4 to 3.7 VDC

H2O 2 (6 to 230 F)

J1-15/16 to J1-14/15

700 to 1800

H2O 2 (ACH7)

J2-7

1.4 to 3.7 VDC

J1-11/12 to J1-9/10

700 to 1800

Oil temp (ACH7)

J2-7

1.4 to 3.7 VDC

Exh temp 1 (32 to 1471 F)

J1-7/8 to J1-5/6

100 to 376

Exh temp 1 (ACH7)

J2-7

0.8 to 3.0 VDC

Exh temp 2 (32 to 1471 F)

J1-3/4 to J1-1/2

100 to 376

Exh temp 2 (ACH7)

J2-7

0.8 to 3.0 VDC

Oil press (0 to 100 psi)

Oil temp (6 to 230 F)

Notes:
1. All output signals on ACH7 are multiplexed.
2. All output voltages on A33 J2 are referenced to ground (J2-15 and J2-16).
3. Must have L1, L2, L3, CT21, CT22, and CT23 for these phase angle outputs.
4. J1-24 (5VDC), J1-23 (signal), J1-18 (return).
5. Must have L1, L2, L3, Bus L1, Bus L2, and Bus L3 for these outputs.
6. L1, L2, and L3 can be 0 to 180 out of phase with Bus L1, Bus L2, and Bus L3, respectively.

4-56

TABLE 4-38. PCC FUSES
REFERENCE
DESIGNATION

RATING

Engine Interface

A31-F1

5 Amp

PCC control B+

Engine Interface

A31-F3

5 Amp

Auxiliary B+ (for panel lights, run and start relays)

Governor Output
Module

A38-F4

10 Amp

Network B+ (to TB1 customer terminal block)

Governor Output
Module

A38-F3

10 Amp

Switched B+ (to TB1 customer terminal block)

Governor Output
Module

A38-F1

15 Amp

Left actuator

Governor Output
Module

A38-F2

15 Amp

Right actuator

F1

20 Amp

Customer B+ (to TB1 customer terminal block)

LOCATION

TB-Bat (Engine
Harness Assembly)

FUNCTION

4-57

RACK POSITION FAULT/TEST
PROCEDURE
The rack position fault/test procedure is a troubleshooting tool for the Rack Position (260) warning
message. This test will isolate the fault to one of
these components; fuel pump, governor output
module (A38), or the PowerCommand control.

7.

Use a calibrated RMS multimeter for accurate measurements. Fluke models 87 or 8060A are good
choices.
8.
1. Move the Run/Off/Auto switch to the Off position.
2. At the engine interface board (A31), place a
jumper wire from A31-TP1 to A31-TP2 (see
Figure 3-4 for test point location).
3. Select RACK TEST from the Setup Menu
(page 5-17) to initiate the fuel rack test. This will
apply power to the governor output module.
4. Are A38 DS1 (RUN) and A38 DS2 (VCC) LED’s
on?
Yes: Go to next step.
No: Possible control problem. Remove jumber wires (Step 2). Restart set and follow
proper troubleshooting procedure.
5. Are fuses A38 F1 and F2 blown?
Yes: Replace blown fuse and restart set.
No: Go to next step.
6. Move both racks from 0mm to 19mm from the
“POS MM” menu (see Setup Menu). Periodi-

9.

10.

cally read the DC voltages from J11-B (left
position voltage) to J11-A and J11-C (right
position voltage) to J11-A. (J11 engine harness
connector is located at the bottom of the accessory box.)
Do these voltages correspond to the voltage on
the display (  .25 VDC) ?
Yes: Test OK. Restart set and monitor
A38-DS5 (left position fault) and
A38-DS6 (right position fault).
No: Go to next step.
Are both left and right voltages out of tolerance?
Yes: Possible control or governor output module problem. Check PWM signal (refer to
Step 4 of error Code 313 in Troubleshooting section).
No: Go to next step.
Move the racks to 0mm from the “POS MM”
menu. Monitor the position voltage of the side
that has the incorrect voltage.
Disconnect the fuel pump connector at the fuel
pump. Does the voltage rise up from approximately 1.3  .25 VDC to 4.5  .25 VDC ?
Yes: Replace defective fuel pump (refer to engine service manual).
No: Replace defective governor output module.
Engine Torque Adjustment procedure must be
performed after replacement of fuel pump or
governor output module. Refer to Section 5.

4-58

LOAD SHARING CONTROLS
TROUBLESHOOT PROCEDURE

If the generator set is not sharing load properly, the
following procedure can be used to diagnose and
solve the problem:

The generator set load sharing settings in the PowerCommand control are factory set and normally do
not require adjustment. The controls are designed
to cause generator sets in the paralleling system to
share load proportionally, based on the standby ratings of the generator sets in the system.

1. The no load speed and voltage of the generator
set must be the same as the system bus. Measure the bus voltage and frequency, and the
generator set voltage and frequency with a true
RMS digital meter. Calibrate the voltage and
current sensing circuits of the control, and
make required adjustments to voltage and frequency to match bus conditions. Adjusting the
voltage and frequency after the generator set is
paralleled to the bus will cause load sharing to
be unequal between generator sets.

When the system is operating normally, the generator sets in an isolated bus (not utility/mains paralleled) paralleling system will share both real (kW)
and reactive (amps) load equally, within plus or minus 5%. For example, if two 1000 kW generator
sets are paralleled and serving a 2000 kW load, the
generator sets should each carry between 950 and
1050 kW.

2. Check to make sure that the load sharing control wiring is properly connected.
3. Check to make sure that each generator set in
the system is capable of carrying its rated load.

In actual practice, load sharing may be much more
precise than plus or minus 5%, but you should not
be concerned about operational problems unless
the load sharing is in error by more than 5%. If dissimilar generator sets are used in a system, there
may be load sharing inequities for a short time when
loads are applied, but the steady state load sharing
should perform to the plus or minus 5% standard.

4. Fine adjustment to the amount of load carried
by each generator set can be made by adjusting the KW BALANCE and KVAR BALANCE
settings under the paralleling setup menu
(Section 5).
5. If the generator sets share load approximately
equally, but there is an oscillating load circulating between the generator sets, the governor
gain may be set too high. Reduce the governor
gain (see Setup Menu, Section 5).

If the generator set is paralleled to a utility (mains)
gird, the amount of load on the generator set is programmed into the control in the setup mode or set
from a remote device. It is NOT a function of the load
sharing control system. See Section 5 for more information on load sharing set−up functions, and utility (mains) paralleling set−up.

6. Consult factory for any other load sharing problems.

4-59

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

4-60

5. Control Service and Calibration
GENERAL

CIRCUIT BOARD
REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT

This section contains circuit board removal and replacement procedures, calibration procedures for
the generator set control and test procedures for the
generator and engine components. Refer to the figures included with this information and also the Wiring Diagrams section when instructed.

No special tools (other than a grounding wrist strap)
are required to remove a circuit board from inside
the control panel or the accessory box.
There are several circuit boards, that when replaced, require you to recalibrate the control panel
functions. Table 5-1 lists the circuit boards and the
appropriate procedure to perform to recalibrate the
control panel. The circuit board locations are shown
in Figure 5-1.
Before you attempt to remove a circuit board, read
the Circuit Board Removal Safety Precautions in
this section.

Before servicing the PCC, it is recommended that all
settings be recorded. This will make sure of correct
and complete readjustment of the PCC in the event
that all previous entries are lost during servicing.

TABLE 5-1. CONTROL PANEL RECALIBRATION
CIRCUIT BOARD/
DEVICE

ADJUSTMENT

PROCEDURE / PAGE

Analog Board (A33)

1. Voltage, Current and PF.
2. Coolant Temperature L & R

Digital Board (A32)

Must recalibrate all values, starting with
the Initial Start Setup procedure.

PT/CT Board (A36)

Voltage, Current and PF.

Setup and Calibration Menus (Page 5-8)

Governor Output
Module (A38)

Torque Adjustment % DC

Engine Torque Adjustment (Page 5-30)

Fuel Pump

Torque Adjustment % DC

Engine Torque Adjustment (Page 5-30)

5-1

Setup and Calibration Menus (Page 5-8)
1. Initial Start Setup (Page 5-4).
2. Adjust Menu (Page 5-6).
3. Setup and Calibration Menus (Page
5-8).

S5 POWER ON/
STANDBY SWITCH

DIGITAL BOARD
A32
DISPLAY BOARD
A35
ANALOG BOARD
A33

ENGINE INTERFACE
A31

CUSTOMER INTERFACE
A34

RUN/OFF/AUTO
SWITCH S12

VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
OUTPUT MODULE
A37

BUS PT MODULE
A39

PT/CT BOARD A36
GOVERNOR
OUTPUT MODULE
A38
ACCESSORY BOX
(A40)

FIGURE 5-1. CIRCUIT BOARD LOCATIONS

5-2

Circuit Board Removal Safety Precautions

Ignition of explosive battery gases
can cause severe personal injury or death. Arcing at battery terminals, light switch or other
equipment, flame, pilot lights and sparks can ignite battery gas. Do not smoke, or switch
trouble light ON or OFF near battery. Discharge
static electricity from body before touching batteries by first touching a grounded metal surface.
WARNING

To prevent circuit board damage due to electrostatic
discharge (ESD), a grounding wrist strap must be
worn when handling circuit boards or socketmounted IC’s. (The wrist strap does not provide a
direct short to ground, but is typically rated at
approximately 1 megohm to ground.)
Attach the clip to a non -painted surface of the control box and place the strap around your wrist before
handling a circuit board.

Ventilate battery area before working on or near
battery—Wear goggles—Stop genset and disconnect charger before disconnecting battery
cables—Disconnect negative (−) cable first and
reconnect last.

CAUTION Electrostatic discharge will damage
circuit boards. Always wear a grounding wrist
strap when handling circuit boards or socketmounted IC’s.

Disconnect battery charger from AC
source before disconnecting battery cables.
Otherwise, disconnecting cables can result in
voltage spikes damaging to DC control circuits
of the set.
CAUTION

Turn off or remove AC power from the battery charger and then remove the negative (−) battery cable
from the set starting battery. This is to make sure
that the set will not start while working on it and to
avoid circuit board damage, caused by voltage
spikes when removing and replacing circuit board
connectors.

Accidental starting of the generator
set can cause severe personal injury or death.
Prevent accidental starting by disconnecting
the negative (−) cable from the battery terminal.
WARNING

WRIST STRAP

NON-PAINTED
SURFACE

GROUND LEAD CLIP

FIGURE 5-2. WRIST STRAP

5-3

INITIAL START SETUP MENU
STANDBY/PRIME submenu: Use the buttons next
to the “” symbols to toggle the standby/prime option. Press the button next to the “>>” in the display
to move to the model select submenu.

The facing page shows a block representation of
the INITIAL START SETUP menu.
Selecting this menu resets all operating parameters to the default values for the
selected set. All previously selected setup and
adjustment settings will be lost. Therefore, this
procedure must be performed by technically
qualified personnel only.
CAUTION

MODEL select submenu: Use the buttons next to
the “” and “” symbols to select the correct generator set model number, frequency and power rating.

This menu appears on the digital display when the
PCC has not been set up for use with a generator
set during factory test, or the digital board was replaced in the PCC.
When this display is showing, you must go through
the Initial Start Setup menu to select the operating
parameters for the generator set. These include
whether the set will be used for Prime Power or
Standby use, the Model Number of the generator
set, and its operating frequency and output voltage.
These choices must be saved into the PCC’s readonly memory before the PCC will accept changes
made to other menus.

VOLTAGE SELECT submenu: Use the buttons
next to the “” and “” symbols to select the correct
generator set nominal line-to-line output voltage.

If the PCC is already set up to operate with a specific
generator set, this menu will not appear when power
is applied. To reset the control and display the Initial
Start Setup menu, you can press RESET, MENU, and
PHASE SELECT buttons at the same time.

DELTA / WYE submenu: Use the buttons next to
the “” and “” symbols to select the delta or wye option.

If you choose to do this, the governor/regulator adjustments and the setup options will be reset to the
default settings (including the editable customer
fault messages). Display calibrations (volts, amps,
PF and coolant temperature) are retained (not reset).
To make sure correct and complete readjustment of
the PCC, it is suggested that all settings be recorded
before you perform the reset function.

SAVE submenu: From the model select submenu,
press the button next to the “>>” in the display to
move to the SAVE submenu. Select SAVE to save
your changes. The MAIN MENU will then be displayed.

CAUTION Improper setup, calibration, or adjustments can cause equipment malfunction or
damage. Setup, calibration, and adjustment
must be performed by technically qualified personnel only.

If “INVALID SETUP” or “INVALID CAL” is displayed
after saving your changes, refer to Digital Board
(A32) Calibration at the end of this section.

5-4

INITIAL START SETUP
(It can be invoked by simultaneously pressing
the Reset, Menu, and Phase Select keys.)

< 

STANDBY/PRIME
_______ >>

>

MODEL
< 
<  (kw mod# freq) >> >

< 
< 

< 

VOLTAGE SELECT
(vac) L-L VAC >>

>

DELTA / WYE
_______ >>

>

< SAVE

>>

>

<
<

ENGINE
ADJUST

GEN
>>

>
>

>>

>

<



STANDBY/PRIME
_______ >>

>

TO LOOP BACK & CHECK:

< SAVE

Indicates OR" Condition

5-5

ADJUST MENU

The ADJUST submenus permit adjustment of the
output voltage and frequency and the start and stop
delay times of the generator set.

VOLTAGE submenu: This is the first submenu.
Use the buttons next to the “” and “” symbols to
adjust output voltage  5%.

The complete calibration procedure is described in
the Calibration Procedure in this section.

FREQUENCY submenu: From the VOLTAGE submenu, press the button next to the “>>” in the display to move to the FREQUENCY submenu. Use
the buttons next to the “” and “” symbols to adjust
output frequency  5%.

The facing page shows a block representation of
the ADJUST menu. If you press the button next to
the word “ADJUST” in the Main menu, the VOLTAGE ADJUST submenu will appear.

START DELAY submenu: This delay applies only
to remote starting in the Auto mode. From the FREQUENCY submenu, press the button next to the
“>>” in the display to move to the START DELAY
submenu. Use the buttons next to the “” and “”
symbols to set the start delay. The start delay adjustment range is 0 to 300 seconds.

As shown in the diagram, the ADJUST menu has
five submenus, including a save/exit procedure.
Voltage and frequency can be adjusted only when
the generator set is running under normal operating
parameters (not in idle mode). For example, if voltage adjustment is selected when the set is in Idle
mode or not running, the digital display will be:

STOP DELAY submenu: This delay applies only
to remote stopping in the Auto mode. From the
START DELAY submenu, press the button next to
the “>>” in the display to move to the STOP DELAY
submenu. Use the buttons next to the “” and “”
symbols to set the stop delay. The stop delay adjustment range is 0 to 600 seconds.

“ VOLTAGE ”
N/A
>>”
“

IDLE SPEED submenu: From the STOP DELAY
submenu, press the button next to the “>>” in the
display to move to the IDLE SPEED submenu. Use
the buttons next to the “” and “” symbols to set the
idle speed. The idle speed adjustment range is 800
RPM 100 RPM. (Default value is 800 RPM.)
The idle speed can be adjusted only when the generator set is running in the idle mode. When not in idle
mode, N/A is displayed in RPM field.

SAVE/EXIT submenu: From the STOP DELAY
submenu, press the button next to the “>>” in the
display to move to the SAVE/EXIT submenu. Select
SAVE to save your changes. At the CHANGES
SAVED submenu, select EXIT to return to the main
menu.
If you select SAVE, the adjustments will be retained
after shutdown, and will be in effect when the set is
restarted. If you select EXIT without saving first, the
adjustments will remain in effect until the generator
set is shut down, but will be reset (and will not be in
effect) when the set is restarted.

5-6

ADJUST
<
<

ENGINE
ADJUST

GEN
>>

>
>

<  VOLTAGE
<  _______

>>

>

<  FREQUENCY
<  _______

>>

>

<  START DELAY
<  _______ SEC >>

>

<  STOP DELAY
<  _______SEC

>>

>

<  IDLE SPEED
<  _______RPM

>>

>

< SAVE
< EXIT

>>

>

CHANGES SAVED
>>
< EXIT

>

<
<

ENGINE
ADJUST

GEN
>>

>
>

CHANGES SAVED
>>
< EXIT

>

<  VOLTAGE
<  _______

>>

>

< SAVE
< EXIT

>>

>

<
<

ENGINE
ADJUST

GEN
>>

>
>

< SAVE
< EXIT

>>

>

<  VOLTAGE
<  _______

>>

>

Indicates OR" Condition

5-7

SETUP AND CALIBRATION MENUS

The facing page shows a block representation of
the VERSION submenus. If you press the button
next to the “>>” in the Main menu display, the VERSION/SETUP/CAL menu will appear.

The setup and calibration menus allow you to calibrate the PCC with the reading from a calibrated
meter. There are four setup and calibration menus
that are selectable from the SETUP/CAL menu:

Improper calibration or adjustment
of the PowerCommand control can cause
equipment malfunction or damage. Calibration
and adjustment must be performed by technically qualified personnel only.
CAUTION

 VERSION AND DISPLAYS
 METERS
 GOVERNOR/REGULATOR
 SETUP

VERSION submenu: If you select VERSION, the
display will show the generator set model number,
frequency, and kW rating, and the date and version
of the operating software.

These four menus are intended for qualified service
personnel only. For this reason, a three-digit access
code must be entered before you can proceed to
those menus.

To display the generator set configuration options,
press the button next to the “>>” in the submenu that
displays the model number, frequency and etc. This
menu provides the following information:

ENTER CODE submenu:
The access code for your PCC is: 5 7 4.
To enter the code:
1. Press the button next to the “” to increment the
first digit.

 Generator set voltage
 WYE or DELTA

2. Press the button next to the “>>” to select the
second digit.

 Standby or Prime

3. Press the button next to the “” to increment the
second digit.

 Parallel or Single
HISTORY: From the VERSION, SETUP/CAL
menu, press the button next to the “>>” in the display to move to the HISTORY submenu. Press the
button next to “HISTORY” to display the last (latest)
recorded error message.

4. Press the button next to the “>>” to select the
third digit.
5. Press the button next to the “” to increment the
third digit.
6. Press the button next to the “>>” to proceed to
the DISPLAYS/METERS submenu. (Provided, of course, that you have correctly entered the access code.)

The software will record (save) up to 20 error messages. The last error detected will always be displayed first. As each new error is detected, the oldest error recorded after 20 will be deleted.

The following sub-sections describe how to select
and make changes to the setup and calibration menus and save the changes made to these menus.

To view the generator set runtime at which the error
occurred and to scroll through the remaining recorded errors, press the button next to the “>>” in
the error message menu to display the RUNTIME,
NEWER/OLDER menu.

Version Menu
The VERSION menu allows you to verify the model
number and frequency of the generator set, the
date and version of the operating software and generator set configuration options. From the VERSION menu you can also review a History file, that
can contain up to 20 error messages.

The buttons next to NEWER and OLDER are used
to scroll up and down through the error messages.
For example, pressing OLDER will display the next
oldest recorded error message. When pressing
NEWER and the last (newest) error message is displayed, or OLDER and oldest error is displayed, the
display will return to the HISTORY menu.

The complete calibration procedure is described in
the Calibration Procedure in this section.

5-8

VERSION MENUS

<
<

ENGINE
ADJUST

< VERSION
< SETUP/CAL

GEN
>>

>
>

<<
>>

>
>

(kW) (model) (hz) <<
______ V___.__ >>

BACK
>
>

(kW) (model) (hz) <<
______ V___.__ >>

>
>

BACK

< VERSION
< SETUP/CAL

<<
>>

>
>

<
<

< VERSION
< SETUP/CAL

<<
>>

>
>

< HISTORY

< VERSION
< SETUP/CAL

<<
>>

>
>

< HISTORY

 ENTER CODE
 __ __ __
>>

>

<
<

ENGINE
ADJUST

GEN
>>

>
>

<<

BACK
>

_______ V
_______

______<< >
______

DISPLAYS VOLTAGE & GEN
SET CONFIGURATION

DISPLAYS ERROR
MESSAGE AND CODE
<<

>

_________________
_________________ >> >

<

RUNTIME _________
NEWER
OLDER

>

REFER TO FOLLOWING
MENUS IN THIS SECTION

Indicates OR" Condition

5-9

Displays Menu

DISPLAYS submenus: The DISPLAYS submenus
are intended for qualified service personnel only.
For this reason, a three-digit access code must be
entered before you can proceed to those menus.

bols to calibrate the selected voltage, current, PF or
coolant temperature reading. Press the button next
to the “>>” in the display to move to the next adjustment.
“VOLTS L12,” “VOLTS L23,” and “VOLTS L31” refer
to voltages measured from L1 to L2, L2 to L3, and
L3 to L1, respectively. Note that the system includes
bus voltage reading provisions (“BUS VOLTS L12,”
“BUS VOLTS L23,” and “BUS VOLTS L31”), which
must be calibrated separately from the generator
set voltage settings.
“PF1, PF2 and PF3” will display N/A when the generator set is not running.
“COOLANT TEMP R” will display “N/A” if the genset
has only one sensor. To calibrate coolant temperature display, a precision resistor (provided in the engine sensor tool) must be temporally substituted for
the temperature sender. Refer to Calibration Procedure in this section.
SAVE/EXIT submenu: From the AMPS L3 submenu, press the button next to the “>>” in the display to
move to the SAVE/EXIT submenu. Select SAVE to
save your changes. At the CHANGES SAVED submenu, select EXIT to return to the DISPLAYS/METERS submenu.

Select SETUP/CAL. The display will show the ENTER CODE submenu. Enter access code (574) as
previously described in this section.
Select DISPLAYS to proceed to the DISPLAYS submenus. Use the buttons next to the “” and “” sym-

If you select SAVE, the adjustments will be retained
after shutdown, and will be in effect when the set is
restarted. If you select EXIT without saving first, the
adjustments will remain in effect until the genset is
shut down, but will be reset (and will not be in effect)
when the set is restarted.

The DISPLAYS submenus permit calibration of the
digital voltage, current, power factor (PF) and coolant temperature displays. Calibration is accomplished by using this section of the menu software to
adjust the display so that it matches the reading taken on an accurate, recently calibrated meter.
The complete calibration procedure is described in
the Calibration Procedure in this section.

The facing page shows a block representation of
the DISPLAYS submenus, which is the first of four
SETUP/CAL menus. If you press the button next to
the “>>” in the Main menu display, the VERSION/
SETUP/CAL menu will appear.
CAUTION Improper calibration or adjustment
of the PowerCommand control can cause
equipment malfunction or damage. Calibration
and adjustment must be performed by technically qualified personnel only.

5-10

DISPLAYS MENU
< VERSION
< SETUP/CAL

<
<

<<
>>

 ENTER CODE
 __ __ __
>>

< DISPLAY CAL
< METERS

<<
>>

>
>

>

>
>

<  AMPS L3
<  _______

>>

>

< 
< 

PF1
_______

>>

>

< 
< 

PF2
_______

>>

>

PF3
_______

<  VOLTS L12
<  _______

>>

>

< 
< 

>>

>

<  VOLTS L23
<  _______

>>

>

<  COOLANT TEMP L
<  _______ F
>>

>

<  VOLTS L31
<  _______

>>

>

<  COOLANT TEMP R
<  _______ F
>>

>

<  AMPS L1
<  _______

>>

>

<  BUS VOLTS L12
<  _______
>>

>

<  AMPS L2
<  _______

>>

>

<  BUS VOLTS L23
<  _______
>>

>

<  BUS VOLTS L31
<  _______
>>

>

< SAVE
< EXIT

>>

>

< SAVE
< EXIT

>>

>

< SAVE
< EXIT

>>

>

<  VOLTS L12
<  _______

>>

>

CHANGES SAVED
>>
< EXIT

>

< DISPLAY CAL
< METERS

<<
>>

>
>

CHANGES SAVED
>>
< EXIT

>

<  VOLTS L12
<  _______

>>

>

< DISPLAY CAL
< METERS

>
>

<<
>>

Indicates OR" Condition

5-11

Meters Menu

Select SETUP/CAL. The display will show the ENTER CODE submenu. Enter access code (574) as
previously described in this section.

The METERS submenus permit calibration of the
control’s analog meters to match the calibrated digital values. (Calibrate the digital display before calibrating the analog meters.) This calibration is accomplished by using this section of the menu software to adjust the selected meter reading so that it
matches the reading provided on the digital display.

Select METERS to proceed to the METERS submenus. Use the buttons next to the “” and “” symbols to calibrate the selected meter to match the
“CAL TO:” value provided on the digital display.
Press the button next to the “>>” in the display to
move to the next calibration.
“VOLT METER” and “% AMPERES” calibration reference the phase that is indicated on the phase
selection LED’s.

The complete calibration procedure is described in
the Calibration Procedure in this section.

The facing page shows a block representation of
the METERS submenus, which is the second of
four SETUP/CAL menus. If you press the button
next to the “>>” in the Main menu display, the VERSION/SETUP/CAL submenu will appear.

NOTE: The % AMPERES meter scale is based on a 0.8
power factor. (100% of rated current is full load current at 0.8 PF.)

SAVE/EXIT submenu: From the HERTZ submenu, press the button next to the “>>” in the display to
move to the SAVE/EXIT submenu. Select SAVE to
save your changes. At the CHANGES SAVED submenu, select EXIT to return to the DISPLAYS/METERS submenu.

Improper calibration or adjustment
of the PowerCommand control can cause
equipment malfunction or damage. Calibration
and adjustment must be performed by technically qualified personnel only.
CAUTION

If you select SAVE, the adjustments will be retained
after shutdown, and will be in effect when the set is
restarted. If you select EXIT without saving first, the
adjustments will remain in effect until the generator
set is shut down, but will be reset (and will not be in
effect) when the set is restarted.

METERS submenu: The METERS submenus are
intended for qualified service personnel only. For
this reason, a three-digit access code must be entered before you can proceed to those menus.

5-12

METERS MENU
< VERSION
< SETUP/CAL

< 
< 

<<
>>

>
>

ENTER CODE
__ __ __
>>

>
< DISPLAY CAL
< METERS

< DISPLAY CAL
< METERS

<<
>>

>
>

<  AC VOLTS
<  CAL TO: ___

>>

>

<  % AMPERES
<  CAL TO: ___

>>

>

<  % LOAD
<  CAL TO: ___

>>

>

<  HERTZ
<  CAL TO: ___

>>

>

< SAVE
< EXIT

>>

>

ENTER CODE

<<
>>

>
>

<

 __ __ __

>>

>

CHANGES SAVED
>>
< EXIT

>

< DISPLAY CAL
< METERS

<<
>>

>
>

CHANGES SAVED
>>
< EXIT

>

<  AC VOLTS
<  CAL TO: ___

>>

>

>
>

< SAVE
< EXIT

>>

>

< DISPLAY CAL
< METERS

< SAVE
< EXIT

>>

>

<
<

 AC VOLTS
 CAL TO: ___

<<
>>

>>

>

Indicates OR" Condition

5-13

Governor / Regulator Menu

GOV GAIN: If the gain adjustment is set too high,
engine speed will “hunt” or oscillate. If gain is set too
low, the engine will respond too slowly to changes in
load—overspeed may result.

The GOV/REG submenus permit adjustment of
voltage regulator and governor parameters.

For paralleling applications, the default value for
governor gain is 70.

All GOV/REG menu values, except for REG VHZ and
GOV RAMP, will display “100%”. The expression
“100%” represents the factory setting (default value)
for the selected set. When increasing or decreasing
the value, you are increasing or decreasing from the
factory default value. (For example, entering “200%”
will double the value; “50%” will decrease the value
by one half.)

GOV INTEGRAL: If this adjustment is set too low,
the engine will respond too slowly to changes in
load. If it is set too high, engine response will be unstable.
GOV RAMP: This adjustment sets the time for the
engine to ramp to full operating speed. This adjustment applies only to set start up and does not affect
the transient response. (Adjustable range: 0
through 10 seconds.)

Default values are preset by the factory. Due to site
variables, the default values may need to be adjusted
to attain peak performance.

REG GAIN: If the gain adjustment is set too high,
output voltage will be unstable. If gain is set too low,
the output voltage will respond sluggishly to
changes in load—overshoot may result.

The facing page shows a block representation of
the GOV/REG submenus, which is the third of four
SETUP/CAL menus. If you press the button next to
the “>>” in the Main menu display, the VERSION/
SETUP/CAL submenu will appear.

REG INTEGRAL: If this adjustment is set too low,
the output voltage will respond sluggishly to
changes in load, resulting in a droop-type response
If it is set too high, output voltage will be unstable.

Improper calibration or adjustment
of the PowerCommand control can cause
equipment malfunction or damage. Calibration
and adjustment must be performed by technically qualified personnel only.
CAUTION

REG VHZ: This underfrequency roll-off adjustment
controls how much excitation is reduced in response to underfrequency. If the value is set too
low, excitation will be cut too fast, and the voltage
will drop too much. If set too high, the generator set
may not be able to pick up rated load in one step.
(Adjustable range: 1 through 50; normal range 7
through 21.)

GOV/REG submenu: The GOV/REG submenus
are intended for qualified service personnel only.
For this reason, a three-digit access code must be
entered before you can proceed to those menus.
Select SETUP/CAL. The display will show the ENTER CODE submenu. Enter the access code (574)
as previously described in this section.

SAVE/EXIT submenu: From the REG VHZ submenu, press the button next to the “>>” in the display to
move to the SAVE/EXIT submenu. Select SAVE to
save your changes. At the CHANGES SAVED submenu, select EXIT to return to the DISPLAYS/METERS submenu.

From the DISPLAYS/METERS submenu, press the
button next to the “>>” in the display to move to the
GOV/REG/SETUP submenu. Select GOV/REG to
proceed to the GOV/REG submenus.

If you select SAVE, the adjustments will be retained
after shutdown, and will be in effect when the set is
restarted. If you select EXIT without saving first, the
adjustments will remain in effect until the generator
set is shut down, but will be reset (and will not be in
effect) when the set is restarted.

Use the buttons next to the “” and “” symbols to
adjust the selected governor and regulator parameters. Press the button next to the “>>” in the display
to move to the next adjustment.

5-14

GOVERNOR/REGULATOR MENU
< VERSION
< SETUP/CAL

<<
>>

>
>

< DISPLAY CAL
< METERS

<<
>>

>
>

< GOV / REG
< SETUP

<<
>>

>
>

< GOV / REG
< SETUP

<<
>>

>
>

< 
< 

GOV GAIN
_______%

>>

>

< 
< 

GOV INTEGRAL
_______%
>>

>

< 
< 

GOV RAMP
_______

>>

>

< 
< 

REG GAIN
_______%

>>

>

< 
< 

REG INTEGRAL
_______%
>>

>

< 
< 

REG VHZ
_______

>>

>

>>

>

< SAVE
< EXIT

<  ENTER CODE
>>
<  __ __ __

>

< DISPLAY CAL
< METERS

<<
>>

>
>

CHANGES SAVED
>>
< EXIT

>

< DISPLAY CAL
< METERS

<<
>>

>
>

CHANGES SAVED
>>
< EXIT

>

< 
< 

>>

>

>
>

< SAVE
< EXIT

>>

>

< DISPLAY CAL
< METERS

< SAVE
< EXIT

>>

>

<
<




GOV GAIN
_______%

<<
>>

GOV GAIN
_______%

>> >

Indicates OR" Condition

5-15

Setup Menu
From the DISPLAYS/METERS submenu, press the
button next to the “>>” in the display to move to the
GOV/REG/SETUP submenu. Select SETUP to
proceed to the SETUP submenus or “>>” to proceed to the RACK TEST submenus.

The SETUP submenus permit selection of several
configuration and operation options. Setup option
defaults are listed in Table 5-2.
TABLE 5-2. SETUP DEFAULTS
SELECTION

DEFAULT

CYCLE CRANK
SYSTEM OF UNITS
*RACK POSITION (CF1)
*GRND FAULT (CF2)
*DAY TANK (CF3)
*HIGH GEN TEMP (CF4)
EGT L
EGT R
LOW COOLANT
LANGUAGE

ON
IMPERIAL
WARN
WARN
WARN
WARN
NO
NO
SHTD
ENGLISH

Use the buttons next to the “” symbols to toggle
the setup options. Press the button next to the “>>”
in the display to move to the next adjustment.
If the cycle cranking option is selected, the menu will
prompt for the selection of cycle number (3, 4, or 5)
and crank and rest times (7 to 20 seconds).
An in-line engine that has the EGT (exhaust gas
temp.) option, select “YES” for EGT L and ’NO” for
EGT R.

* Default display messages for customer faults (CF) 1

RACK TEST submenu: The RACK TEST submenu is used to initiate the rack position diagnostic
test. This test is used to determine if the PCC is
properly controlling the rack position of the actuators. To initiate this test, the Run/Off/Auto switch
must be set to the Off position.

through 4. To change the customer fault message(s) or select the desired fault condition (WARN
or SHTD), refer to heading Edit Customer Fault
Messages.

The facing page shows a block representation of
the SETUP submenus, which is the fourth of four
SETUP/CAL menus. If you press the button next to
the “>>” in the Main menu display, the VERSION/
SETUP/CAL submenu will appear.

When exiting this test or if the Run/Off/Auto switch
is moved to either the Run or Auto position, the PCC
software will re-initialize the governor duty cycle to 2
(0%) and allow the engine starting sequence to proceed as normal.

Improper calibration or adjustment
of the PowerCommand control can cause
equipment malfunction or damage. Calibration
and adjustment must be performed by technically qualified personnel only.
CAUTION

To perform the rack test, refer to the Rack Position
Fault/Test Procedure in Section 4.
TORQUE ADJ %DC submenu: This submenu is
used to adjust the engine torque through the digital
display to compensate for engine/electronic variations. If the generator set is not providing the name
plate kilowatt rating, the torque limit can be adjusted
at this menu. Refer to Engine Torque Adjustment in
this section for a detailed description of how to perform this adjustment.

SETUP submenu: The SETUP submenus are intended for qualified service personnel only. For this
reason, a three-digit access code must be entered
before you can proceed to those menus.
Select SETUP/CAL. The display will show the ENTER CODE submenu. Enter the access code (574)
as previously described in this section.

5-16

SETUP MENU

< VERSION
< SETUP/CAL

< 
< 

<<
>>

>
>

ENTER CODE
__ __ __
>>

>

< DISPLAY CAL
< METERS

<<
>>

>
>

< GOV / REG
< SETUP

<<
>>

>
>

< RACK TEST
< TORQUE

<<

>

<  ___ POS_MM
<  ___ POS_VOLT

< GOV / REG
< SETUP

<<
>>

>
>

< RACK TEST
< TORQUE

<<

>

< TORQUE ADJ %DC<< >
<  ___ % DC

CYCLE CRANK
ON / OFF
>>

>

< 

<

SYSTEM OF UNITS
MET or IMP>>



<<

>

IF CYCLE CRANK ON :
<  # OF CYCLE S
<  (3, 4, 5 or 6) >>

>

<  CRANK
CYCLE TIME−SEC
CRANK
< 
 ON
(7 to
/ OFF
20)
>>

>

<  REST TIME−SEC
(7 to 20)
>>
< 

>

>

CONTINUED

Indicates OR" Condition

5-17

Setup Menu (Cont.)

to 16 characters. The fault code number will remain
the same, this code cannot be edited.

Edit Customer Fault Message(s): The four customer fault messages shown in Table 5-2 are editable. Customer Fault 1 is reserved for the RACK
POSITION fault. Do not modify this fault name or
change the fault condition (WARN to SHTD).

If these messages are changed, you should note
these changes in the Troubleshooting section of the
Operator’s manual for this generator set.

To enter the desired customer fault message, press
the button next to the “>>” in the display to display
the customer fault message to be changed, Customer Fault 2, 3 or 4.

SAVE/EXIT submenu: From the LANGUAGE submenu, press the button next to the “>>” in the display to move to the SAVE/EXIT submenu. Select
SAVE to save your changes. At the CHANGES
SAVED submenu, select EXIT to return to the DISPLAYS/METERS submenu.

Press the upper-left button by the display to select
the desired character. Press the upper-right button
to move the cursor to the next character to be
changed. (Holding this button down will return the
cursor to the first position.) The message can be up

If you select SAVE, the adjustments will be retained
after shutdown, and will be in effect when the set is
restarted. If you select EXIT without saving first, the
adjustments will remain in effect until the generator
set is shut down, but will be reset (and will not be in
effect) when the set is restarted.

5-18

SETUP MENU (Cont.)

CONTINUED

< RACK POSITION
<  SHTD / WARN >>

>
>

<
<

 SHTD / WARN >>

>
>

< RUPTURE BASIN
<  SHTD / WARN >>

>
>

<
<

 SHTD / WARN >>

>
>

<



GROUND FAULT

HIGH GEN TEMP

< 

EGT L
YES / NO

>>

>

EGT R
YES / NO

>>

>

LOW COOLANT LVL
<

 SHTD or WARN
>>

>

<  LANGUAGE
<  _______________>>

>

< SAVE
< EXIT

>

>>

CHANGES SAVED
>>
< EXIT

>

< DISPLAY CAL
< METERS

CHANGES SAVED
>>
< EXIT

>

< 

<<
>>

>
>

CYCLE CRANK
>>

>

< SAVE
< EXIT

>>

>

< DISPLAY CAL
< METERS

< SAVE
< EXIT

>>

>

<

 ON / OFF

<<
>>

>
>

CYCLE CRANK
ON / OFF
>>

>

Indicates OR" Condition

5-19

Paralleling Setup Menu

set at 110% of the generator set base load setting.
When the load govern signal is between 1 VDC and
4.5 VDC the control will operate the generator set at
a load level which is determined by a linear relationship between the kW reference and the load govern
signal.

The PARALLELING SETUP submenus adjust the
control parameters for generator set protection,
synchronizing and load sharing for both isolated
bus and utility (mains) paralleling applications. Utility (mains) parallel applications may require adjustment of both the “isolated bus” and “utility” branch
submenus.

ISOLATED BUS ADJUSTMENTS
SYNC TIME LIMIT: This parameter adjusts the time
delay in seconds before the Fail To Synchronize
alarm will operate.

The sync check (permissive) function is operational
in both automatic and manual (RUN) modes. The
control will make sure that the generator set is at
proper voltage, within the defined sync check window for the defined period of time and that phase
rotation is correct. When all criteria are met, the paralleling breaker is closed automatically by the control (auto mode), or by operation of the breaker
close switch by the operator (run mode).

− PWR LIMIT (%): Adjusts the reverse power set
point. For PowerCommand generator sets, a typical
set point is 10-15%.
− PWR LIMIT (TIME): Adjusts the reverse power
function time delay. A typical time delay which is
suitable for PowerCommand generator sets is 3
seconds.

The synchronizing function of the PowerCommand
control is enabled when the control has brought the
generator set to rated speed and voltage, and has
sensed that bus voltage is available. The control automatically adjusts the generator set speed and
voltage to match the bus frequency and voltage.
The control can force the generator set to match a
bus voltage and frequency in a range of minus 40%
to plus 10% of normal bus conditions. When the
paralleling breaker has closed, the control will bring
the generator set back to normal voltage and frequency.

Lower reverse power set points can result in nuisance reverse power shutdown faults.

PERM WIN-PHASE: Adjusts the width of the permissive (sync-check) acceptance window. The adjustment range is from five to twenty electrical degrees. Recommended set point is 20 degrees for
isolated bus applications, and 15 degrees for utility
(mains) paralleling applications.
PERM WIN-TIME: Adjusts the time period (in seconds) for which the generator set must be synchronized with the system bus, before a breaker close
signal is issued by the PowerCommand control.
Available range is 0.5 to 5 seconds. Recommended
value for PowerCommand generator sets is 0.5
seconds for isolated bus applications.

When the generator set is paralleled to another
generator set, the control provides automatic load
sharing functions for both real (kW) and reactive
(kVAR) loads. Load sharing is proportional between
generator sets based on their standby ratings. If two
generator sets of different sizes are paralleled, they
will assume the same percentage of the system
load automatically. This can easily be verified on the
analog % Load meters on the front of the PowerCommand control panel.

Adjusting the control for a smaller sync-check window or longer time delay will cause synchronizing
time to be extended.

SYNC GAIN: The sync gain adjustment controls
how quickly the governor will respond to try to minimize the bus/generator phase difference. Increasing the gain speeds up the response. If the gain is
too high instability can result.

When the utility paralleling mode is enabled and the
generator set paralleling breaker is closed, the generator set will assume load based on external analog input signal. The input signal must be calibrated
from 0−5 VDC. When the signal is at 0.5 to 1 VDC,
the control will operate the generator at no load in
parallel with the utility (mains) source. At 4.5 VDC
and greater, the control will operate the generator

SYNC INTEGRAL: The sync integral adjustment
controls the rate at which the governor will be adjusted to try to minimize the bus/generator phase
difference. The lower the number the slower the response.

5-20

PARALLELING SETUP MENU
< VERSION
< SETUP/CAL

< 
< 

<<
>>

>
>

ENTER CODE
__ __ __
>>

>

< DISPLAY CAL
< METERS

<<
>>

>
>

<<
SETUP

>
>

< ISO BUS
< UTILITY

<<

>

< ISO BUS
< UTILITY

<<

>

<  SYNC TIME LMT
< 
120
>>

>

<  -PWR LMT (%)
< 
10
>>

>

<  -PWR LMT (TIME)
< 
3
>>

>

<  PERM WIN-PHASE
20
>>
< 

>

<  PERM WIN-TIME
< 
.5
>>

>

<  SYNC GAIN
< 
95

>>

>

<  SYNC INTEGRAL
< 
12
>>

>

< GOV / REG
< PARALLEL

B (CONTINUED)

A (CONTINUED)

Indicates OR" Condition

5-21

ator set. This also allows modification of the rate of
load assumption on transient load change.
1ST START FAIL: Time delay in seconds after a
signal from the first start master is not sensed by the
PCC that a FIRST START FAIL warning is displayed.
RAMP UNLD TIME: When a load demand stop input is sensed the load is ramped down from the
present load level on the set to the ramp unload level in the time specified in seconds.
RAMP UNLD LEVEL: The load demand ramp unload function will ramp the load down from the present level on the set to this level before opening the
set circuit breaker. Value shown is in % of genset
standby rating.
RAMP LOAD TIME: When the load demand stop
signal is removed the load is ramped from 0kW to
the load share level in the specified time after the
circuit breaker closes.
LOSS FIELD (LOSS OF EXCITATION) TIME and
LEVEL: Adjusts the time delay on the Loss of Excitation fault. Generator sets with version 1.07 and
higher (9−26−96 and later) firmware may be adjusted for time delay on this condition. the default
value is 2 seconds.
Generator sets with version 2.0 and higher firmware
allow adjustment of both time delay and reverse
VAR set point. Default values are 10 seconds and
20%.

ISOLATED BUS ADJUSTMENTS (Cont.) (A)
KW BALANCE: This function adjusts the kW load
sharing function of the generator set. Before adjusting this value, all generator set calibrations should
be performed. If the total load on the system is not
shared proportionately, the kW Balance can be
used to adjust the generator set for more precise
load sharing. Increasing the kW Balance value will
cause the generator set to reduce the percentage of
the total kW load on that set.
KVAR BALANCE: This function adjusts the kVAR
load sharing function of the generator set. Before
adjusting this value, all generator set calibrations
should be performed. If the total load on the system
is not shared proportionately, the kVAR balance can
be used to adjust the generator set for more precise
load sharing. Increasing the kVAR balance value
will cause the generator set to reduce the percentage of the total kVAR load on that set.
KW GAIN: Adjusts the rate of change of kW load on
the generator set. With a constant load on the system, if the generator set load is constantly changing, reduce the gain adjustment on the generator
set. This also allows modification of the rate of load
assumption on transient load change.
KVAR GAIN: Adjusts the rate of change of kVAR
load on the generator set. With a constant load on
the system, if the generator set load is constantly
changing, reduce the gain adjustment on the gener-

5-22

PARALLELING SETUP MENU (Cont.)

A (CONTINUED)
<  KW BALANCE
< 
165 + ___% >>

>

<  KVAR BALANCE
< 
0 + ___% >>

>

<  KW GAIN
6
< 

>>

>

<  KVAR GAIN
< 
300

>>

>

<  1ST START FAIL
10
>>
< 

>

<  RAMP UNLD TIME
< 
10
>>

>

<  RAMP UNLD LEVEL
< 
20
>>

>

<  RAMP LOAD TIME
< 
10
>>

>

<  LOSS FIELD TIME
< 
2
>>

>

<  LOSS FLD LEVEL
20
>>
< 

>

< SAVE
< EXIT

>>

>

< DISPLAY CAL
< METERS

< SAVE
< EXIT

>>

>

< GOV / REG
< PARALLEL

<<
>>

>
>

<<
SETUP

>
>

Indicates OR" Condition

5-23

erator set has closed to the system bus when utility
(mains) paralleled. Decreasing this value will result
in slower loading of the generator set.
KVAR INTEGRAL: The kVAR integral adjustment
is used to control the response of the generator set
to large load changes when utility (mains) paralleled. Use of a higher integral value will result in
slower response and reduced kVAR overshoot on
load assumption or rejection, especially on large
system load changes. Decreased integral values
will also result in slower load acquisition and rejection.
RAMP LOAD TIME: This is the ramp time from
present set load to level determined by the load set
analog input. This is active when the control first enters the load govern mode.
RAMP UNLD TIME: This is the ramp time from
present set load to the 0 kW. This ramp is active
when the load set analog input is less than 0.5 volts.
MULTIPLE/SINGLE: This selection modifies the sequence of operation and functions of the inputs and
outputs of the control on TB1 to allow for application
of the control in multiple generator set applications
(“Multiple” selection), where generator sets are paralleled to each other and may also be paralleled to a
utility (mains) service; or for applications where a
single generator set is used with a breaker pair for
closed transition power transfer functions (“Single”
selection). See Table 5-3 for a description of the operation and use of TB1-51 input.

UTILITY (MAINS) ADJUSTMENTS (B)
BASE LOAD (%): Controls the maximum kW load
level that the generator set will operate at when paralleled with the utility (mains). The value shown indicates the steady state load on the generator as a
percent of the generator set standby rating.
Check generator set ratings for maximum load level
at which the generator set should operate when
paralleled with the utility (mains). Extended operation at load levels in excess of the generator set rating can cause abnormal engine wear or premature
engine failure.
PF LEVEL: Adjusts the power factor that the generator set will run at when paralleled to the utility
(mains). Recommended setting is 1.0.
KW GOVERN GAIN: Controls the rate that the generator set kW load is increased after the generator
set has closed to the system bus when utility
(mains) paralleled. Decreasing this value will result
in slower loading of the generator set.
KW INTEGRAL: The kW integral adjustment is
used to control the response of the generator set to
large load changes when utility (mains) paralleled.
Use of a higher integral value will result in slower response, and reduced kW overshoot on load assumption or rejection, especially on large system
load changes. Decreased integral values will also
result in slower load acquisition and rejection.
KVAR GOVERN GAIN: Controls the rate that the
generator set kVAR load is increased after the gen-

5-24

Multiple − In the MULTIPLE configuration, the control is set up for proper operation in a system where
the gensets are configured similar to that shown in
Figure 5-3 or 5-4. In these illustrations, 52-Gn are
the paralleling circuit breakers and 52-Fn are feeder
circuit breakers that provide generator set power to
load transfer devices. 52-U is a utility (mains) circuit
breaker and 52-GM is a generator bus main breaker. 52-U and 52-GM provide power transfer func-

tions in the system.
Upon receiving a start signal, the gensets automatically start, select one generator set in the system to
be the first one to close to the bus using the First
Start Sensor system, synchronize, and load share.
Upon receiving a signal to the control that the generator sets are closed to the utility (mains), the generator sets automatically ramp to their preset base
load level.

PCC

PCC

PCC

G1

G2

G3

52-G1

52-G2

52-G3

BUS VOLT
SENSE

52-F1

52-F1

52-F1

SWITCHGEAR

TO LOADS

FIGURE 5-3. TYPICAL MULTIPLE CONFIGURATION

PCC

PCC

PCC

G1

G2

G3
G3

52-G1

52-G2

52-G3

BUS VOLT
SENSE
FROM
UTILITY (MAINS)

52-GM

52-U

TO LOADS
52-F1

52-F1

52-F1

SWITCHGEAR
TO LOADS

FIGURE 5-4. TYPICAL MULTIPLE CONFIGURATION

5-25

Single − The SINGLE configuration (limited to
ONLY the electrical configuration shown in Figure
5-5) allows for incorporation of a single PowerCommand generator set in a power system that provides
load transfer functions and various utility paralleling
functions. In the SINGLE configuration, PowerCommand provides all the generator set control
functions including synchronizing, load govern (import/export control and var/PF control), and genset
breaker control functions; equipment provided by
others provides utility (mains) breaker control, utility
source sensing, and other functions.

When utility (mains) power returns, the remote device turns on the synchronizer in the PCC, the PCC
synchronizes the genset-to-utility (mains) service,
and the remote device closes the utility (mains)
breaker (52-U). When the PCC senses that 52-U is
closed, it checks the voltage on the external load set
terminals (TB1-59 and 60) and ramps to the commanded load level. The remote device control system determines when to open the genset breaker
by removing the start signal from the genset control.
When it is removed, the genset ramps down to zero
load and opens the genset breaker (52-G1).
If the generator set receives a start signal when the
utility (mains) service is available, the generator set
starts and accelerates to rated voltage and frequency. It automatically synchronizes and closes its
breaker. When the generator breaker is closed, the
generator set ramps to the load level commanded
by the signal on the external load set terminals
(TB1-59 and 60).

The PCC monitors the position of the generator set
breaker (52-G1) and the utility (mains) breaker
(52-U). In a black start condition, the generator set
receives a start signal from a remote device. If the
PCC senses no voltage available on the bus voltage connection and the utility (mains) breaker is
open, it closes the generator set breaker.

FROM
UTILITY (MAINS)

PCC

BUS VOLT
SENSE

G1

52-G1

52-F1

52-U

52-F1

52-F1

SWITCHGEAR
TO LOAD(S)
(# LOADS OPTIONAL)

FIGURE 5-5. UTILITY-SINGLE CONFIGURATION

5-26

PARALLELING SETUP MENU (Cont.)

B (CONTINUED)
<  BASE LOAD %
< 
80
>>

>

<  PF LEVEL
< 
1.00

>>

>

<  KW GOVERN GAIN
100
>>
< 

>

<  KW INTEGRAL
< 
4
>>

>

<  KVAR GOVERN GAIN
300
>>
< 
>
<  KVAR INTEGRAL
< 
200
>>

>

<  RAMP LOAD TIME
< 
10
>>

>

<  RAMP UNLD TIME
10
>>
< 

>

<  MULTIPLE/SINGLE
< 
SINGLE>>

>

< SAVE
< EXIT

>>

>

< DISPLAY CAL
< METERS

< SAVE
< EXIT

>>

>

< GOV / REG
< PARALLEL

<<
>>

>
>

<<
SETUP

>
>

Indicates OR" Condition

5-27

CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

5. Adjust VOLTAGE (generator set output voltage) so that the calibrated voltmeter reads the
desired voltage. (Use a calibrated voltmeter
because the value displayed on the PCC digital
display may not be calibrated at this time;
therefore, its accuracy is unknown.)
6 Select the Frequency adjust menu.
7. Verify that the frequency displayed on the calibrated meter is the desired frequency. If not,
adjust to the desired frequency. (Note: If the
frequency reading on the digital display is not
the same as frequency shown on calibrated
meter, there is an equipment malfunction.)
8. If no frequency or voltage adjustment was
made, select EXIT. If an adjustment was made,
SAVE, then EXIT.

WARNING Contacting high voltage components can cause electrocution, resulting in severe personal injury or death. Calibration and
adjustment must be performed by technically
qualified personnel only. Read and observe all
WARNINGS and CAUTIONS in your generator
set manuals.
CAUTION Improper calibration or adjustment
of the PowerCommand control can cause
equipment malfunction or damage. Calibration
and adjustment must be performed by technically qualified personnel only.

The calibration procedure is divided into 7 subsections, with the subsections arranged in a specified
order. If two or more of the following subsections are
required to calibrate the PCC, they must be completed in the order shown.

Digital Voltage Display Calibration
The paralleling bus must be de-energized while
voltage calibrations are performed. If this is not
possible, disconnect and isolate bus voltage inputs to the Bus PT Module (A39) before attempting voltage calibration.

When removing and replacing a defective circuit
board, you may have to perform one or more of the
following subsections. Table 5-1 (Control Panel Recalibration) provides a list of the circuit boards that
require calibration when replaced and the calibration procedure(s) that must be performed.

9. Select “>>” from the Main Menu (Page 5-9).
From this menu proceed to the VOLTS L12
menu (Page 5-11).
10. With the generator set OFF, attach a calibrated
frequency/voltmeter to the AC output from L1
to L2.
11. Start the generator set and allow it to reach
normal operating speed.
12. Calibrate voltage reading for VOLTS L12 so
that the reading on the digital display agrees
with the calibrated voltmeter.
13. Shut the generator set OFF.
14. Repeat steps 10 through 13 for L23 and L31.
(In step 10 attach meter to the AC output from
L2 to L3 to calibrate VOLTS L23 and then L3 to
L1 to calibrate VOLTS L31.)
15. If no calibration was made, select EXIT. If a calibration was made, SAVE, then EXIT.

Use a calibrated RMS multimeter for accurate measurements. Fluke models 87 or 8060A are good
choices.

Initial Start Setup
1. Refer to Page 5-4, which describes how and
when you should perform this procedure.
To verify if the PCC is set to operate with a specific generator set, refer to the VERSION menu
(Page 5-9). This menu will show the generator
set model number, frequency, and kW rating. If
any of these values are incorrect, you must perform the Initial Start Setup procedure.

Voltage and Frequency Adjustment
2. With the generator set OFF, attach a calibrated
frequency/voltmeter to the AC output from L1
to L2.
3. Select ADJUST from the Main Menu (page 5-7)
to display the VOLTAGE adjust menu.
4. Start the generator set and allow the generator
set to reach normal operating speed.

Digital Ammeter Display Calibration
16. Select “>>” from the Main Menu (Page 5-9).
From this menu proceed to the AMPS L1 menu
(Page 5-11).
17. With the generator set OFF, attach a calibrated
ammeter to L1.

5-28

32. Calibrate the temperature reading to match the
temperature indicated on the calibration tool.
33. Repeat step 32 for COOLANT TEMP R if the
engine uses two sensors.
34. If no calibration was made, select EXIT. If a calibration was made, SAVE, then EXIT.

18. Start the generator set and allow it to reach
normal operating speed.
19. Load the generator set to maximum rated kVA
at rated voltage.
20. Calibrate the reading for AMPS L1 so that the
reading on the digital display agrees with calibrated ammeter.
21. Repeat steps 17 through 20 for L2 and L3. (In
step 17, attach meter to L2 to calibrate AMPS
L2 and then L3 to calibrate AMPS L3.)
22. If no calibration was made, select EXIT. If a calibration was made, SAVE, then EXIT.

Digital Bus Voltage Calibration
35. Select “>>” from the Main Menu (Page 5-9).
From this menu proceed to the Bus Volts L12
menu (Page 5-11).
36. With the genset OFF, attach a calibrated frequency/voltmeter to the alternator AC output
from L1 to L2.

Digital Power Factor Display Calibration
Power factor calibration is not required except in applications requiring a higher accuracy than 5%. If
the 5% accuracy is not acceptable, further calibration will require reactive load sufficient to reach 0.8
PF at rated load, and calibrated instruments with
1% accuracy or better. Typical load rack instruments are not accurate enough to perform this procedure.

The paralleling bus must be de-energized while
voltage calibrations are performed. If this is not
possible, disconnect and isolate bus voltage inputs to the Bus PT Module (A39) before attempting voltage calibration.

37. Start the genset and allow it to reach normal
operating speed and voltage.
38. Push the breaker close switch on the front of
the PowerCommand control and verify that the
paralleling breaker has closed by observing the
closed lamp on the control panel and physical
check of the breaker.
39. Calibrate the voltage reading for Bus Volts L12
so that the reading on the digital display
matches the reading on the calibrated meter.
40. Shut the generator set OFF.
41. Repeat steps 36 through 40 for Bus Volts L23
and Bus Volts L31.
42. If no calibration was made, select EXIT. If a calibration was made, SAVE, then EXIT.

23. Select “>>” from the Main Menu (Page 5-9).
From this menu proceed to the PF1 menu
(Page 5-11).
24. With the generator set OFF, attach the power
factor meter to L1.
25. Start the generator set and allow it to reach
normal operating speed.
26. Load the generator set to maximum rated kVA
at rated voltage.
27. Calibrate the reading for PF1 so that the reading on the digital display agrees with power factor meter.
28. Repeat steps 24 through 27 for L2 and L3. (In
step 24, attach meter to L2 to calibrate PF2 and
then L3 to calibrate PF3.)
29. If no calibration was made, select EXIT. If a calibration was made, SAVE, then EXIT.

Analog meter calibration
43. Select “>>” from the Main Menu (Page 5-9).
From this menu proceed to the A−C VOLTS
ADJ TO menu (Page 5-13).
44. Start the generator set and allow the generator
set to reach normal operating speed.
45. Calibrate the analog Voltmeter to the digitally
displayed value.
46. Calibrate the analog % Amps meter to the digitally displayed value.
47. Calibrate the analog % Load meter to the digitally displayed value.
48. Calibrate the analog Frequency meter to the
digitally displayed value.
49. SAVE, then EXIT.

Digital Coolant Temperature Display
Calibration
An engine sensor calibration tool is required to perform this procedure.
30. With the generator set OFF, replace the coolant
temperature sender with the precision resistor
provided in the calibration tool.
31. Select “>>” from the Main Menu (Page 5-9).
From this menu proceed to the COOLANT
TEMP L menu (5-11).

5-29

ENGINE TORQUE ADJUSTMENT

2. Start the generator set and allow it to reach normal operating speed.
3. Load the generator set to maximum rated kVA
at rated voltage.
4. Adjust the torque limit up or down to achieve
the proper generator set frequency, under
maximum load.

The engine torque fuel limit is set in the PowerCommand control. This limit is adjustable (0% to +1% of
duty cycle units, which corresponds approximately
to 0% to +2% engine horsepower) through the digital display to compensate for engine/electronic variation. If the generator set is not providing the nameplate kilowatt rating, the torque limit can be adjusted
with the following procedure.

If you select SAVE, the adjustments will be retained
after shutdown, and will be in effect when the set is
restarted. If you select EXIT without saving first, the
adjustments will remain in effect until the generator
set is shut down, but will be reset (and will not be in
effect) when the set is restarted.

1. Select “>>” from the Main Menu (Page 5-9).
From this menu proceed to the Torque Adjust
%DC menu (Page 5-17).

5-30

ACCESSORY BOX CONTROL
COMPONENTS

points for remote control and monitor options. The
set can be equipped with one or more of the following components (customer terminal block TB1 is
standard). Refer to Page 9-6 for typical connections
to TB1.

The generator set accessory box (Figure 5-6) which
is located on the backside of the control housing,
contains components that provide connection

TB1-1

OPTIONAL
COMMON ALARM
RELAY K14

OPTIONAL RUN RELAYS
K11, K12 & K13

TB1-40

OPTIONAL RTD
RELAY
OPTIONAL
THERMISTOR
RELAY 160/140 C

GOVERNOR
OUTPUT MODULE
A38

VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
OUTPUT MODULE
A37
PT/CT BOARD A36

FIGURE 5-6. ACCESSORY BOX COMPONENTS

5-31

TABLE 5-3. A39/A40 TB1 CUSTOMER INPUTS
A39/A40 TB1
TERMINAL #
A39

1, 2, 3, 4

A40

FUNCTION

DESCRIPTION

Bus PT Input (On
Bus PT Module)

Phase to Neutral input voltages from system bus (load side of paralleling
breaker.

5

Remote Start

Close to ground to start generator set. (RUN/OFF AUTO switch must be
in AUTO position.)

6

Remote
Emergency Stop

Grounding this input causes an immediate shutdown.

16 − 19

Customer Fault

Grounding these terminals initiates an alarm or shutdown condition in
the control.

20

Fault Reset

Applying a momentary ground signal to this terminal clears warning or
shutdown faults in the control. (Except Emergency Stop.)

21

Engine Idle

Applying a ground signal at this terminal will cause engine to run at
recommended idle speed. Voltage will be disabled.

22

Low Fuel

Grounding this input activates the Low Fuel warning.

35

Rupture Basin
Alarm

Applying a ground signal to this point will cause the generator set to
annunciate a Rupture Basin Alarm.

Common Alarm
Warning

Form C output contact for remote indication of warning condition on
generator set.

46

Utility Parallel
Signal

Apply a 24VDC signal to terminal 46 to indicate to the control that it is
operating in parallel with a utility (mains) service.

47

Utility Parallel
Signal

Apply a ground signal to terminal 47 to indicate to the control that it is
operating in parallel with a utility (mains) service.

50

Master First
Start/Synchronizer
Enable

For isolated bus or multiple generator set utility (mains) applications, a
B+ signal from a remote Master First Start Sensor is applied on this
terminal. For single generator set utility (mains) parallel applications,
apply 24VDC to this terminal to enable synchronizer function in control.

41, 42

CONTINUED

5-32

TABLE 5-3. A39/A40 TB1 CUSTOMER INPUTS (Cont.)
A39/A40 TB1
TERMINAL #
A40

FUNCTION

DESCRIPTION

51

Load Demand

Close to ground to initiate load demand mode in PowerCommand
control. (Select “Multiple” in Paralleling Setup Menu to enable load
demand mode.)

51

Utility Single
Verify

For single generator set utility (mains) applications (“SINGLE” selected
in the Paralleling Setup Menu), this terminal must be connected
[strapped] to ground to enable breaker closure. (Version 1.07, beginning
9-26-96 only.)

52

Breaker Open /
Inhibit

Close to ground to manually open the paralleling breaker or inhibit
breaker closure.

53

Breaker Position

Close to ground to indicate breaker closed.

54, 55

kVAR Load
Share

Load Sharing Lines. Connect to load sharing lines in other generator
sets in the system.

56, 57

kW Load Share

Load Sharing Lines. Connect to load sharing lines in other generator
sets in the system.

59, 60

External Load
Set

Analog 0 − 5 VDC input to control kW load level on generator set when
the generator set is paralleled to utility.

message to be customized to represent the type of
device that is attached the the fault input.

Remote Start: When the Run/Off/Auto switch is in
the Auto position, grounding this input initiates the
engine cranking and start sequence. This circuit
must be opened to permit resetting a shutdown condition with the Reset input.

Customer Fault 1 (A40 TB1-16) is reserved for the
RACK POSITION fault. Do not modify this fault name
or change the fault condition (Warning to Shutdown).

Low Fuel: Grounding this input actuates the Low
Fuel warning. This input can be connected to a local
day tank or to a main fuel tank that is located on site.
When the switch grounds this designated input, the
input will “wake up” the control, if it is not operating,
and then initiate the fault.

The “default” message that is displayed, when
ground is applied to the input, is as follows:
Fault 1 = RACK POSITION
Fault 2 = GRND FAULT
Fault 3 = DAY TANK
Fault 4 = HIGH GEN TEMP

Customer Fault Inputs 1 through 4: Grounding
any one of these inputs activates the corresponding
warning or shutdown sequence. Warning or shutdown status is selected in the setup menu.

If Fault 2 or 3 input is grounded, the control will
“wake up” if it is not operating, and then initiate the
fault.

External sensing equipment must be connected to
the designated digital input.

Fault Reset: When the Run/Off/Auto switch is in
the Auto position and the remote start switch is
open, grounding this input resets any warning and
latched shutdown fault (except Emergency Stop,
which must be reset at the front panel.)

The four customer fault messages can be separately edited in the setup menu to display any desired
message. This allows each customer “default” fault

5-33

used to enable the synchronizer in the PowerCommand control. (See Paralleling Setup Menu, path
B.) A 24VDC signal applied to the terminal will
cause the generator set to synchronize with the
voltage reference signal applied to the bus PT module (A39).

Engine Idle: When the set is operating in the RUN
mode, grounding this input causes generator build
up to be inhibited and the engine to be governed at
800 RPM. When ground is removed from this input,
the set returns to normal speed and voltage.
Engine idle operation is applicable only in the RUN
mode. The PCC operating program does not permit
engine idle operation when the set is operating in
AUTO mode.

All PCC’s in a system should be programmed to a different first start fail time. This will help prevent simultaneous closure of breakers in the event of a failure
of the master first start module

When the engine idle function is enabled, the control automatically sets lower oil pressure warning
and shutdown trip points to reflect the lower operating speed. When the engine idle function is removed and the set reverts to normal operating
speed, the control automatically resets oil pressure
warning and shutdown trip points to the normal settings.

Load Demand: On receipt of a signal on the Load
Demand terminals (normally open, close to
ground), the generator set will ramp down to a minimum load level and the paralleling breaker will
open. The generator set will run for a cool-down period and shut down. LOAD DEMAND SHUTDOWN
will be displayed on the PowerCommand panel.

Remote Emergency Stop: Grounding this input
causes an immediate shutdown. Emergency stop
must be reset at the front panel.

When the Load Demand input is removed, the generator set will start, synchronize and close to the
system bus and accept it’s proportional share of the
total load on the bus.

Master First Start/Synchronizer Enable: This input is received from a Master First Start Sensor,
which is mounted remotely from the PowerCommand control. The input is a pulsed signal which is
used by the PowerCommand control to enable safe
closing of the paralleling breaker when the system
bus is de-energized. the control will receive a pulse
from the Master First Start Sensor approximately
once per second. If the PowerCommand control
does not receive a pulse within the programmable
time delay (default is 10 seconds), the FIRST
START warning is displayed by the control and a
backup system is enabled by the control.

The Load Demand function of the PowerCommand
control is only active when the RUN/OFF/AUTO
switch is in the AUTO position and “PARALLEL” is
selected in the Paralleling Setup Menu.
Utility Single Verify: For single generator set utility
(mains) applications, this input must be strapped to
ground before the generator set breaker will close
when the utility breaker is opened.
The Load Demand function of the PowerCommand
control is only active when the RUN/OFF/AUTO
switch is in the AUTO position and “SINGLE” is selected in the Paralleling Setup Menu.

When the system is set up for paralleling a single
generator set with a utility (mains) bus, this input is

5-34

For Load Set Voltage of 1.0 volts and lower, the genset will ramp to no load. For Load Set Voltage levels
4.5 volts and higher, the genset will be controlled to
the preset base load.

Utility (Mains) Parallel Input: Closure of a normally open contact to ground on terminal 47 and applying a 24VDC signal to terminal 46 will cause the
PowerCommand control to begin operation in a utility (mains) paralleling mode. The ground signal is
usually applied by operation of auxiliary contacts in
the utility paralleling breaker. In this operation
mode, the control will ignore inputs from the load
sharing lines and operate at the load level which is
determined by the magnitude of the Load Govern
signal and the base load adjustment in the control
setup.

A change in the Load Set Voltage will cause the
genset to ramp to the new commanded kW level.
Ramp rate is controlled by Ramp Load Time and
Ramp Unload Time. (See Utility (Mains) Adjustments elsewhere in this section.) In the load govern
state, kVar load is always a function of the preset
power factor and the % kW load.
Parallel Breaker Open/Close Inhibit: This function is operational only when the RUN/OFF/AUTO
switch is in the AUTO position. Closing a normally
open contact to ground on this contact will cause
the paralleling breaker to open if it is closed, or prevent it from closing if it is open. Removing the
ground signal will cause the PowerCommand control to return to normal operation.

Load Govern: This input is enabled when the control has received a utility (mains) parallel input. A
0−5V signal applied to terminals 59 and 60 will direct the control to operate the genset at a fraction of
the preset base load (%). Operating load level is determined by the formula:
31.4 * (Load Set Voltage – 1) = % kW load

5-35

Operating PowerCommand in Droop Mode

governor and voltage regulation system droop level:

The PowerCommand control is designed to operate
isochronously (with no intended droop) so that voltage and frequency are as constant as possible
when the generator set is paralleled to other PowerCommand generator sets. In certain situations,
however, such as paralleling with other generators
that are operating in droop mode, it may be necessary to operate the control in a droop mode for frequency, voltage, or both.

1. Set the no load speed and voltage at the desired level. Bus must be de-energized when
this setting is made, or disconnect Bus PT
module.
2. Apply 100% load to the generator set, and adjust the KW load sharing gain to obtain the desired full load operating frequency. Adjust the
KVAR load sharing gain to obtain the desired
full load operating voltage. Refer to Figure 5-7
for typical gain settings for specific droop levels.
3. Repeat the process for other generator sets in
the system.
4. When initial settings have been made, test the
system with all available load, and verify that
the generator sets share load approximately
equally at no load and maximum available
load.

Note that when the generator set is paralleled to a
utility (mains) service it is recommended that the
control be operated in its utility parallel mode, rather
than in droop, even if other generator sets in the
system operate in droop for that function. The droop
mode in PowerCommand will only work when all the
other generator sets in the system are operating in
droop and the system bus voltage and frequency
change with load.
PowerCommand controls that are set up to operate
in droop mode must include the paralleling option
(H532). The generator set should be set up for multiple unit paralleling, but load sharing interconnecting wiring is not used. Connect a 5K resistor across
terminal A40-TB1-54 and 55 (KVAR) to cause voltage to droop. A 5K resistor across terminal
A40-TB1-56 and 57 (KW) will cause frequency to
droop. Resistors can be used on one or both of the
load sharing terminal connections, depending on
the needs of the application.

Proper adjustment of load sharing in droop operation requires use of both real and reactive load
banks. It is possible that precise load sharing will not
be possible with all generator sets in the system at all
load levels, due to the non-linearity of the droop
characteristic of some generator sets. In that case, it
is generally best to set up the system so that available load is equally shared at the maximum load level
expected on the system. Note also that the synchronizer is active and functional in PowerCommand
even when the system is set up for droop load sharing. Manual paralleling and system synchronizing
should be performed by the PowerCommand control. It is recommended that paralleling breakers be
electrically operated by the PowerCommand control.

Complete all start up procedures as described in
Section 8 of this manual up to the point that you are
ready to make load sharing adjustments. To set the

5-36

% DROOP
9.00
8.00

% DROOP @1800 RPM
% DROOP @1500 RPM

7.00
6.00
5.00
4.00
3.00
2.00
1.00
0.00
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

LOAD SHARE GAIN

FIGURE 5-7. PERCENT SPEED DROOP VERSUS KW LOAD SHARE GAIN

5-37

TB1 Customer Outputs
Refer to Page 9-9 for typical connections to TB1.
TABLE 5-4. TB1 CUSTOMER OUTPUTS
TB1
TERMINAL #

FUNCTION

DESCRIPTION

1

B+ Auxiliary Power 24 VDC control power supply, fused at 20 amps.

2

Switched B+
Auxiliary Power

3, 4

24 VDC control power available when genset is running, fused at 10
amps.

Ground

7, 8, 9

Common
Shutdown

Form C contact set to indicate to a remote device that a generator set
shutdown fault has occurred.

10, 11
N-K20

Parallel Breaker
Close Signal

Normally open contact which closes to close a remote paralleling
breaker.

14, 15

Network Data

Terminations for network data twisted pair, operational when generator
set is equipped with generator control module (GCM).

NFPA Fault
Contacts

Normally open contact which closes to indicate that a specific fault has
occurred in the generator set. Common is terminal 33.

38, 40

Ready to Load

Indicates that the generator set is at rated frequency and voltage and is
ready to accept load. Normally open contact between 38 and 40, which
is common.

39, 40

Load Dump

Normally open contact which closes to indicate that the generator set is
overloaded.

41, 42

Common Warning

Normally open contact that closes to indicate a warning condition on the
generator set.

43, 44

Common Warning

Normally closed contact that opens to indicate a warning condition on
the generator set

48, 49
N-K21

Parallel Breaker
Open Signal

Normally closed contact which opens to close the paralleling breaker.

23−32, 33

5-38

Common Alarm: One set of form-C contacts, rated
for 2 amps at 30 VDC. Any shutdown causes the
common alarm relay to be energized. This output is
often used to energize an audible alarm.

Paralleling Breaker Control: Contacts are provided to allow the PowerCommand control to operate a remote paralleling circuit breaker. A normally
open contact will close to signal the paralleling
breaker to close. A normally closed contact will
open to open the paralleling breaker.

Load Dump: One set of normally open (NO) contacts, rated for 2 amps at 30 VDC. If an overload occurs which causes generator set frequency to drop
more than 3 hertz below nominal for more than 3
seconds, or a load of more than 105% of the standby rating is applied to the generator set for more
than 60 seconds, the normally open load dump contacts are closed. This relay is energized before
shutdown (for overload or underfrequency) occurs.

When the RUN/OFF/AUTO switch is in the RUN
position the breaker signals will be initiated on operation of the paralleling breaker control switches
on the front panel of the PowerCommand control.
The breaker control switches on the front panel of
the control are not operational in other control operation modes.

Ready To Load: One set of normally open (NO)
contacts, rated for 2 amps at 30 VDC. This output is
activated whenever AC voltage and frequency exceed 90% of nominal.

When the RUN/OFF/AUTO switch is in the AUTO
position, the PowerCommand control will automatically close the paralleling breaker if the system bus
is de-energized and the master first start sensor
pulse is received, or if synchronous condition with
the bus is achieved.

Switched B+: This is a fused 10 amp, 24 volt
switched output. This output is activated by the run
pilot signal, at the governor output module. (Fuse is
located on Governor Output Module.)

Warning Alarm: One set of normally open (NO)
and one set of normally closed (NC), rated for 2
amps at 30 VDC. Any warning causes the warning
alarm relay (labeled Spare Relay on Customer Interface board) to be energized. This output is often
used to energize an audible alarm.

B+: This is a fused 20 amp, 24 volt output. (Fuse is
located on TB-BAT terminal block of the engine harness.)

5-39

Run Relays (K11, K12, 13)

fans, pumps and motorized air dampers. The run
relays are energized when the generator set reaches operating speed.

The optional run relays are rail mounted inside the
accessory box (Figure 5-6). The rail mount allows
you to easily remove and replace the snap-on relays. The generator set can be equipped with one,
two or three run relays.

The contacts are rated:

 10 amps at 28 VDC or 120 VAC, 80%PF
 6 amps at 240 VAC, 80%PF
 3 amps at 480/600 VAC, 80%PF

The three-pole, double-throw run relays (Figure
5-8) are used to control auxiliary equipment such as

K11, K12, K13

CUSTOMER
CONNECTIONS

K11, K12, K13

K11, K12, K13

K11
RUN RELAY

A40-TB1-2
(SWITCHED B+)

K12
RUN RELAY

K13
RUN RELAY

NO

NO

NO

NC

NC

NC

COIL
COM

A40-TB1-4
(B-)

FIGURE 5-8. OPTIONAL RUN RELAYS (K11, K12, K13)

5-40

Shutdown Alarm Relay (K14)

vices such as audible alarms. Any generator set
shutdown will energize the alarm relay.

The optional shutdown alarm relay is rail mounted
inside the accessory box (Figure 5-6). The rail
mount allows you to easily remove and replace the
snap-on relay.

The contacts are rated:

 10 amps at 28 VDC or 120 VAC, 80%PF
 6 amps at 240 VAC, 80%PF
 3 amps at 480/600 VAC, 80%PF

The three-pole, double-throw shutdown alarm relay
(Figure 5-9) is often used to energize warning de-

K14

CUSTOMER
CONNECTIONS

K14

K14

K14
COMMON SHUTDOWN
ALARM

JUMPER WIRE
REQUIRED FOR K14
RELAY OPTION
A40-TB1-4
(GND)

NO
NC

A40-TB1-8
(COMMON
SHUTDOWN ALARM)
COIL

A40-TB1-1
(B+)

COM

FIGURE 5-9. OPTIONAL SHUTDOWN ALARM RELAY (K14)

5-41

A40-TB1-7
(COMMON SHUTDOWN
ALARM)

RTD Relay (Optional)

LED’s are used to indicate which inputs exceed the
setpoint.

The optional RTD relay is rail mounted inside the
accessory box (Figure 5-6). This relay is used to
monitor six separate temperature zones in the generator windings using resistive temperature detectors (RTDs). The relay determines the sensed temperature and acts to isolate, alarm, or initiate corrective action.

The relay terminals 11, 12 and 14 are for customer
connection. These terminals can be attached to any
one of the four Customer Fault inputs on TB1 to provide a warning/shutdown condition or to other customer warning devices. (Refer to Setup Menu in
Section 7, which describes how to modify the customer fault message and to select a warning or
shutdown condition.)

The RTD relay (Figure 5-10) compares the six inputs to the predetermined setpoint (temperature
setpoint is factory adjusted). If one or more of the inputs exceed the setpoint, the output relay is energized. LED’s indicate the state of the output relay
(green for normal, red for tripped). Additional red

The contacts are rated:

 240 VAC, 5 amps non-inductive
 24 VDC, 25 amps resistive

TEMPERATURE RELAY CONNECTIONS

TO RTD TERMINAL
BLOCK

(+)

OUTPUT RELAY
(CUSTOMER USE)

PWR

(−)

24 VDC

A40TB1-4
(GROUND)
A40TB1-2
(SWITCHED B+)

FIGURE 5-10. RTD RELAY (OPTIONAL)

5-42

WHITE
WHITE

Thermistor Relay (Optional)

when the thermistor chain resistance reaches 3000
500 ohms.

The optional thermistor relays are rail mounted inside the accessory box (Figure 5-6). Each relay
monitors three thermistors (one per phase) that are
connected in series inside the generator. One series or chain of thermistors are rated at 140 C and
the other at 160 C. The 140 C relay is commonly
used in a pre-alarm circuit and the 160 C relay in a
shut-down circuit. The relay will energize (trip)

THERMISTORS

The relay terminals 1, 2 and 3 are for customer connection and are normally connected to a breaker
shunt trip or a load shed circuit (Figure 5-11).
The contacts are rated:

 3 amps at 250 VAC
 1 amp at 480 VAC

A B C

WHITE/RED

BLUE

FAULT CHANNELS
(CUSTOMER
CONNECTIONS)

A40-TB1-4
(GROUND)
A40-TB1-2
(SWITCHED B+)
RELAY CONTACTS

FIGURE 5-11. THERMISTOR RELAY (OPTIONAL)

5-43

ENGINE SENSORS

the PCC responds. The switches function by closing the fault or warning circuit to the engine chassis
ground (battery negative [−]). The low coolant level
switch has its own ground wire.

Figures 5-12 shows the locations of the oil and coolant temperature and oil pressure senders to which

COOLANT TEMPERATURE
SENDER

OIL PRESSURE
SENDER (FAR SIDE)

LOW COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SWITCH

OIL TEMPERATURE
SENDER (FAR SIDE)

FIGURE 5-12. ENGINE SENSOR LOCATIONS

5-44

LOW COOLANT
LEVEL SWITCH

MAGNETIC SPEED PICKUP UNIT (MPU)
INSTALLATION
To install the MPU sensor, bar the engine until a
gear tooth on the flywheel lines up in the center of
the mounting hole. Thread the sensor in gently by
hand until it just touches the gear tooth. Back it out
one quarter turn and set the locknut.

MPU
SENSOR

Do not use fan blade to bar over engine. That can damage blades and cause property damage and personal injury.
CAUTION

ENGINE
FLYWHEEL
RING GEAR

FIGURE 5-13. MPU SENSOR

5-45

CURRENT TRANSFORMER (CT)
INSTALLATION

B. CT21 − U load leads (A phase)
CT22 − V load leads (B phase)
CT23 − W load leads (C phase)
C. Route the appropriate leads through each CT.
 6 lead generator sets − generator output
leads are routed through the CT’s.
 12 lead generator sets − load wires are
routed through the CT’s.
D. Reconnectable generator sets (12 leads) have
dual secondary CT’s (3 pins). The CT secondary wire marked 1 is connected to pin 1 of the
CT. CT secondary wire marked 2/3 is connected to pin 2 for high voltage generator sets
or to pin 3 for low voltage generator sets. (Refer
to Reconnection Diagram.)
Non-reconnectable generator sets (6 leads)
have single secondary CT’s (2 pins).
 The lead from CT terminal #1 connects to
the metering circuitry.
 The lead from CT terminal #2/3 connects
to ground.

Current transformers (CT’s) are required on generator sets that contain AC meters. The CT’s must be
installed as noted in the following CT Installation
Requirements. Improper installation of CT’s will
cause a “335 Reverse Power” shutdown error.
Refer to the Reconnection Diagram to identify the
output leads/phase that must be routed through
each CT, and also appropriate transformer post
selection for meter sensing leads. The transformers
are labeled CT21, CT22 and CT23 on the reconnection wiring diagram. (The Reconnection Diagram is located on the upper side cover of the control housing.)

CT Installation Requirements
A. The CT has a dot on one side. This dot must be
facing toward the generator (conventional current flowing into the dot). A dot is also used to
indicate pin 1 of the CT.

5-46

DIGITAL BOARD (A32) CALIBRATION

resistor) to the initial setup and perform one of the
following:

The digital board (Figure 5-14) contains three resistors that are used to calibrate the digital board for
different generator set models. One of these resistors may need to be removed in order to calibrate/
initialize the PowerCommand control to the generator set model. Table 5-5 provides the necessary information to determine which resistor that may
need to be cut to select the desired generator set
model.

1. If the model numbers corresponding to the cut
resistor and the initial setup are compatible, according to Table 5-5, the calibration is validated. The control will store the appropriate information based on calibration and initial setup
data in EEProm. The initial setup is now complete and the control can start the engine.
2. If the model number corresponding to the cut
resistor and the initial setup are not compatible
the control will display the fault “INVALID SETUP” (fault code 401). No initial setup data is
saved and the control will not leave the initial
setup menu until this fault condition is corrected.
3. If the control senses that more than one resistor has been cut, the control will display the
fault “INVALID CAL” (fault code 402). No initial
setup data is saved and the control will not
leave the initial setup menu until this fault condition is corrected.

To find the exact genset model, spec. level and engine rating, refer to the engine data tag on the left
bank intake manifold.
After the appropriate resistor selection is made, the
PowerCommand control must be re-initialized. Refer to Initial Start Setup Menu in this section to initialize the PowerCommand control. When the initial
setup save button is pushed, the PowerCommand
control will compare the calibration selection (cut

TABLE 5-5. DIGITAL BOARD (A32) CALIBRATION
STANDBY MODEL
NUMBERS

ENGINE RATING

EPROM KIT P/N
SINGLE

PARALLEL

RESISTOR
REMOVED

1000DFHD-60/900DFHD-50

QST30-G4

0300-4721-04

0300-4721-16

R38

1000DFHD-60/900DFHD-50

QST30-G5-NR1

0300-4721-04

0300-4721-16

R38

900DFHC-60/800DFHC-50 SPEC A-C QST30-G3

0300-4721-35

0300-4721-40

NONE

900DFHC-60/800DFHC-50 SPEC D

QST30-G3

0300-4721-35

0300-4721-40

R38

800DFHB-60/700DFHB-50 SPEC A-D

QST30-G2

0300-4721-04

0300-4721-16

R36

800DFHB-60/700DFHB-50 SPEC E

QST30-G2

0300-4721-35

0300-4721-40

R37

800DFHB-60/700DFHB-50 SPEC E

QST30-G2-NR1

0300-4721-35

0300-4721-40

R37 & R38

750DFHA-60/620DFHA-50 SPEC A-D

QST30-G1

0300-4721-04

0300-4721-16

NONE

750DFHA-60/620DFHA-50 SPEC E

QST30-G1

0300-4721-35

0300-4721-40

R36

750DFHA-60/620DFHA-50 SPEC E

QST30-G1-NR1

0300-4721-35

0300-4721-40

R36 & R37

5-47

DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4

DS7
DS6
DS5

FIGURE 5-14. DIGITAL BOARD (A32)

5-48

R36
R37
R38

6. Servicing the Generator
GENERAL

WARNING Incorrect service or replacement of
parts can result in severe personal injury or
death, and/or equipment damage. Service personnel must be trained and experienced to perform electrical and mechanical service.
WARNING
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE. The
PCC1301 control box must be opened only by
technically qualified personnel. Voltages of up
to 600 VAC are present in the PCC box. These
voltages can cause electrical shock, resulting
in personal injury.

This section describes how to isolate a high AC voltage fault to the PCC control circuitry or generator,
and the procedures to test, disassemble and reassemble the generator (Figure 6-1).

EXCITER
STATOR

RECONNECTION
TERMINALS

END BRACKET
PMG
STATOR
END
BEARING

STATOR

PMG
ROTOR

BLOWER
COUPLING

EXCITER
ROTOR
ROTATING
RECTIFIER
ASSEMBLY
ROTOR

DRIVE
DISCS

FRAME

END BRACKET/ENGINE
ADAPTOR
PRESSURE
PLATE

AIR DISCHARGE
COVERS

ROTOR
SHAFT

FIGURE 6-1. TYPICAL GENERATOR

6-1

GENERATOR/PCC CONTROL ISOLATION
PROCEDURE

side of the system to avoid inadvertently imposing 24 volts on the system.
5. Check polarity again. Polarity must be correct
or this test will be inconclusive because the induced and residual magnetic polarities in the
exciter stator will be opposed.

The following procedure is used to determine if the
generator or the PCC control circuitry is causing a
high AC voltage shutdown fault.

WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE. Touching
uninsulated high voltage parts inside the control box can result in severe personal injury or
death. Measurements and adjustments must be
done with care to avoid touching hazardous
voltage parts.

1. Throw the line circuit breaker OFF and shut
down the set.
CAUTION This test involves unregulated excitation of the generator. To prevent damage to
the generator due to overcurrent, make sure
that all loads have been disconnected and that
all faults have been cleared from the power output terminals of the generator.

For your protection, stand on a clean dry wooden platform or clean rubber insulating mat,
make sure your clothing and shoes are dry, remove jewelry and use tools with insulated handles.

2. Remove the housing cover of the accessory
box and remove plug P10 from connector J10
of the voltage regulator output module (A37).
See Figure 3-9.
3. Prepare to measure output voltage across the
generator terminals while the set is running.
4. Bring two jumpers from a 12 volt battery for
connection to the X (Field +) and XX (Field −)
pins of plug P10.
X = Red wire of P10-6
XX = Brown wire of P10-3
Connect the jumper from the positive (+) post
of the battery to the X pin (red wire) of P10-6.
Be prepared to connect the jumper from the
negative (−) post of the battery to the XX pin
(brown wire) of P10-3. If one of the 12 volt
cranking batteries is used, bring the jumpers
from the battery connected on the grounded

6. Start the set and connect the jumper from the
battery negative (−) terminal to the XX lead.
7. The generator circuitry is probably okay if rated
output voltage or higher is obtained and the
voltages for all phases are balanced when the
exciter is powered by a 12 volt battery. Refer to
Section 4 to troubleshoot the PCC control circuitry. (Normal excitation voltage ranges from
approximately 10 VDC at no-load to approximately 40 VDC at full−load.)
8. If the voltages are unbalanced, troubleshoot
the main stator first. If the voltages are uniformly low, troubleshoot the exciter and field circuits
first. Perform the Winding Resistance Test procedure for the desired windings as noted in this
section.

6-2

Insulation Resistance Testing

TESTING THE GENERATOR

The insulation resistance test should be performed
before the initial start-up of the generator set or
when low insulation is suspected, e.g. damp or wet
windings.

These tests can be performed without removing the
generator. Before starting tests, disconnect the
negative (−) cable from the battery to make sure the
engine will not start while performing these tests.

A 500 VAC megger is recommended for insulation
testing. A test consists of applying the test potential
between the winding and ground (winding laminations).

Ignition of explosive battery gases
can cause severe personal injury or death. Arcing at battery terminals, light switch or other
equipment, flame, pilot lights and sparks can ignite battery gas. Do not smoke, or switch
trouble light ON or OFF near battery. Discharge
static electricity from body before touching batteries by first touching a grounded metal surface.
WARNING

The highest resistance values shown in Table 6-1
should be obtained for a new generator with dry
windings. For a set that has been in service, the resistance reading should not be less than the lower
value shown.
If low readings are obtained, the cause should be investigated and corrected before the generator set is
returned to service.

Ventilate battery area before working on or near
battery—Wear goggles—Stop genset and disconnect charger before disconnecting battery
cables—Disconnect negative (−) cable first and
reconnect last.

If moisture is determined to be the cause of low test
readings, a winding drying process will be required.
1. Disconnect plug J10 from the voltage regulator
output stage module.
2. Disconnect the AC control input leads from the
generator output terminals. The AC control
leads are marked 5, 6, 7 and 8. Refer to the appropriate Reconnection Diagram in Section 8.
3. If the RTD (resistive thermal device) option is
installed, ground all six RTD temperature
leads. Each RTD has three leads, one red and
two white leads. Total of 18 leads must be
grounded.
4. Perform the Insulation Resistance Test procedure for the desired windings as noted in this
section.

Disconnect battery charger from AC
source before disconnecting battery cables.
Otherwise, disconnecting cables can result in
voltage spikes damaging to DC control circuits
of the set.
CAUTION

WARNING Accidental starting of the generator
set can cause severe personal injury or death.
Prevent accidental starting by disconnecting
the negative (−) cable from the battery terminal.

TABLE 6-1. GENERATOR INSULATION RESISTANCE
FRAME GENERATOR
SIZE
VOLTAGE

MINIMUM RESISTANCE (MEG)

MEGGER
VDC
SETTING

MAIN
STATOR

MAIN ROTOR

PMG

EXCITER
STATOR

P7

600 VAC or
less

500

10.0 − 1.0

10.0 − 1.0

10.0 − 1.0

10.0 − 1.0

HC6

600 VAC or
less

500

5.0 − 1.0

5.0 − 1.0

5.0 − 1.0

5.0 − 1.0

6-3

Drying the Windings

3. Connect the positive and negative leads of a
variable 12 VDC source to P10 as follows:
Positive lead − Red wire of P10-6 (X)
Negative lead − Brown wire of P10-3 (XX)

If low readings are obtained and moisture is determined to be the problem, the windings should be
dried out and the test repeated. Use the generator
heaters or blow warm air through the generator with
a fan. A more effective way is to use a bolted
3-phase short across the generator terminals. This
procedure must be done as described or equipment
damage can result. To do this:

Voltage must begin at zero
volts and be gradually increased or equipment damage will result. The current will increase rapidly and it must be monitored to
prevent exceeding the generator rating.
CAUTION

4. Attach a clamp-on ammeter to the generator
leads to measure generator current, adjust the
12 VDC source for zero voltage, start the set
and very slowly increase the excitation voltage.
Obtain the highest current possible without exceeding generator rating.
5. Run the genset for approximately one hour,
then repeat the insulation resistance tests. If
further drying time is indicated, continue the
drying process.

1. Bolt the generator three phase output terminals together. See the reconnection diagrams
in Section 8.
2. Remove the housing cover of the accessory
box and remove plug P10 from connector J10
of the voltage regulator output module (A37).
See Figure 3-11.

6-4

EXCITER STATOR

Testing Winding Insulation Resistance: Disconnect exciter stator leads F1 and F2 from their connectors in the AC generator wiring harness and isolate them from ground.

Testing Winding Resistance: Measure winding
resistance with a Wheatstone bridge or digital ohmmeter. Replace the stator if winding resistance is
not as specified by Table 6-2.

Connect the megger between one of the leads and
ground and conduct the test as instructed under Insulation Resistance testing.

Before performing the following insulation resistance test, refer to the Insulation Resistance Test procedure at the beginning of this section.

MEASURE WINDING
INSULATION RESISTANCE
BETWEEN EITHER LEAD
AND THE STATOR
LAMINATIONS

MEASURE WINDING RESISTANCE
BETWEEN THE TWO STATOR
LEADS, F1 (X) AND F2 (XX)

FIGURE 6-2. TESTING THE EXCITER STATOR

TABLE 6-2. WINDING RESISTANCE VALUES*
FRAME
SIZE

EXCITER
STATOR

EXCITER
ROTOR

MAIN
ROTOR

P7B

17.5

0.048

P7C

17.5

6G

MAIN STATOR
WINDING
11

WINDING
12

WINDING
17

WINDING
07

1.67

N/A

0.0016

N/A

0.0026

0.048

1.85

N/A

0.00126

N/A

0.002

17

0.158

1.44

0.0037

0.0148

N/A

0.011

6H

17

0.158

1.54

0.0027

0.0108

N/A

0.0072

6J

17

0.158

1.73

0.0024

0.0096

N/A

0.006

6K

17

0.158

1.95

0.0019

0.0076

N/A

0.0052

* Resistance figures are approximates, at 68 F (20 C) + 10%.

6-5

EXCITER RECTIFIER BRIDGE (ROTATING
RECTIFIER ASSEMBLY)

Replacing Diodes: Make sure the replacement
diode is of the correct polarity. Disconnect the pigtail
from the terminal post and unscrew the old diode.
Apply heat-sink compound under the head of the
diode. Make sure the compound does not get on the
threads. Torque the diodes to 36 to 42 in-lbs (4 to 4.8
Nm) and the pigtail terminals to 24 in-lbs (2.7 Nm)
when reassembling.

The exciter rectifier bridge is mounted on the exciter
rotor, inboard, facing the main rotor. It consists of a
positive plate and a negative plate, split diametrically. Each carries three diodes, three terminal posts
for connecting exciter rotor leads to the diode pigtails and a terminal for the main rotor (generator
field) lead. A surge suppresser is connected across
the two plates to prevent transient voltages that
could damage the diodes.

Surge Suppresser Testing and Replacement:
Remove the suppresser. Replace the suppresser if
it appears to have overheated or if ohmmeter readings indicate less than infinite resistance (end of
scale) in both directions. Torque the terminals to 24
in-lbs (2.7 Nm) when reassembling.

Testing Diodes: Disconnect the diode pigtails from
the terminal posts. Using an ohmmeter, measure
electrical resistance between each diode pigtail and
the plate on which the diode is mounted. Reverse
the meter test probes and repeat the tests. The
electrical resistance across each diode should be
high in one direction and low in the other. If the resistance is high or low in both directions, replace the
diode.

CAUTION Layers of dust can cause diodes to
overheat and fail. Brush dust off regularly.

DIODE (ONE OF SIX)
DISCONNECT THE DIODE
PIGTAIL FROM THE TERMINAL
AND MEASURE ELECTRICAL
RESISTANCE BETWEEN THE
PIGTAIL AND THE METAL
PLATE UNDER THE DIODE

TERMINAL
(ONE OF SIX)

DIODE PLATES
(TWO)

SURGE SUPPRESSER
REMOVE TO TEST

FIGURE 6-3. TESTING THE ROTATING RECTIFIER ASSEMBLY

6-6

EXCITER ROTOR

Before performing the following insulation resistance test, refer to the Insulation Resistance Test procedure at the beginning of this section.

Testing Winding Resistance: Disconnect the six
rotor winding leads from the terminal posts on the
rectifier assembly. With a Wheatstone bridge, measure electrical resistance across each pair of rotor
windings: U (CR1 or CR4) and V (CR2 or CR5), V
(CR2 or CR5) and W (CR3 or CR6), W (CR3 or
CR6) and U (CR1 or CR4). See the winding schematic. Replace the whole rotor shaft assembly if the
resistance of any winding is not as specified in Table
6-2.

Testing Winding Insulation Resistance: Disconnect all six exciter rotor leads from diode terminals
CR1 through CR6 and isolate them from ground.
Connect the megger between one of the leads and
ground and conduct the test as instructed under Insulation Resistance testing.

MEASURE WINDING INSULATION
RESISTANCE BETWEEN ANY LEAD
OR THE TERMINAL TO WHICH IT IS
CONNECTED AND THE ROTOR
LAMINATIONS

MAIN ROTOR
LEADS

WINDING SCHEMATIC

DISCONNECT THE SIX ROTOR WINDING
LEADS FROM THEIR TERMINALS AND
MEASURE ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE
ACROSS EACH PAIR OF WINDINGS: U-V,
V-W, W-U

FIGURE 6-4. TESTING THE EXCITER ROTOR

6-7

MAIN ROTOR (GENERATOR FIELD)

Insulation Resistance and PI Test: Disconnect
the main rotor and voltage suppressor leads from
terminals F1+ and F2− on the rotating rectifier assemblies and isolate them from ground. Tag and
mark each lead with its terminal number (F1+ or
F2−).

Testing Winding Resistance: Disconnect the two
leads of the main rotor from the terminals on the rotating rectifier assembly. See Figure 6-5. Measure
electrical resistance between the two leads with a
Wheatstone bridge or digital ohmmeter. Replace
the rotor if the resistance is not as specified in Table
6-2. Connect the rotor leads and torque the terminals to 23 in-lbs (3.3 Nm) when reassembling.

Connect the megger between one of the rotor leads
and ground and conduct the test as instructed under Insulation Resistance testing.

Before performing the following insulation resistance test, refer to the Insulation Resistance Test procedure at the beginning of this section.

MEASURE WINDING INSULATION
RESISTANCE BETWEEN EITHER ROTOR
LEAD AND THE ROTOR LAMINATIONS

DISCONNECT THE MAIN ROTOR LEADS
FROM THE ROTATING RECTIFIER ASSEMBLY
AND MEASURE THE WINDING RESISTANCE
BETWEEN THEM

FIGURE 6-5. TESTING THE MAIN ROTOR

6-8

MAIN STATOR

Insulation Resistance and PI Test: Remove and
separate all leads of the generator from the generator load terminal block. Number of neutral leads
(three or six) to remove will vary between low and
medium voltage generators.

Testing Main Stator Winding Resistance: Disconnect all stator leads from the terminals to which
they are connected. Using a Wheatstone bridge
having at least 0.001 ohm precision, measure electrical resistance across each pair of stator leads:
U1-U2, V1-V2, W1-W2, U5-U6, V5-V6 and W5-W6.
Replace the stator if the resistance of any winding is
not as specified in Table 6-2.

Connect the megger between one phase of the stator and ground while grounding the other two
phases and conduct the test as instructed under Insulation Resistance testing.

Before performing the following insulation resistance test, refer to the Insulation Resistance Test procedure at the beginning of this section.

Repeat this step in turn for the other two phases.

WHEATSTONE
BRIDGE

FIGURE 6-6. TESTING THE GENERATOR STATOR

6-9

TESTING THE PMG

3. Measure voltage across lead pairs J10-1 &
J10-4, J10-4 & J10-5, and J10-5 & J10-1. Voltage should be at least 150 VAC for 50 Hz sets
and at least 180 VAC for 60 Hz sets, and should
be approximately the same for each set of
leads. If the voltages are low or uneven, check
all the leads and connections between the voltage regulator output stage module and the
PMG and repair as necessary before disassembling the PMG.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE. Touching
uninsulated high voltage parts inside the control box can result in severe personal injury or
death. Measurements and adjustments must be
done with care to avoid touching hazardous
voltage parts.
WARNING

For your protection, stand on a clean dry wooden platform or clean rubber insulating mat,
make sure your clothing and shoes are dry, remove jewelry and use tools with insulated handles.

4. Stop the set and measure electrical resistance
across lead pairs J10-1 & J10-4, J10-4 &
J10-5, and J10-5 & J10-1 with a Wheatstone
bridge or digital ohmmeter. The resistance
should be 2.6 10% ohms for frame size P7
and HC6.

1. Disconnect plug J10 from the voltage regulator
output stage module.
2. Start the engine at the set and let the speed stabilize.

6-10

BEARING
INSPECTION/REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT

P7 generator component parts cannot be ordered
from Cummins. Refer to the Newage nameplate
and supply all available information. Contact your
nearest Newage distributor for assistance in ordering component parts.

The end bearing is enclosed in a pre-packed machined cartridge.
Bearing Inspection: If a situation occurs which allows an opportunity to visually inspect the end bearing with it installed, check the color of the grease.
The color of the grease is the only indication that
can be used to determine if the bearing is defective.

1. Lift slightly on end of rotor shaft and install
wooden shims to hold rotor on center with stator.
2. Install bearing onto rotor shaft. Refer to bearing
kit instruction sheet.

New grease is a whitish-beige color but some mild
discoloration will occur with use. If the grease
shows signs of gross discoloration, the bearing
should be replaced.

3. Install two threaded studs into end bearing cartridge to aid subsequent procedures. Position
the end bearing cartridge assembly close to
proper position for hole alignment with endbracket.

Bearing Removal: The bearing is press fitted onto
the shaft and can be removed with standard workshop tools (i.e., two or three legged manual or hydraulic bearing pullers). The bearing should only be
removed for replacement (bearing is destroyed during removal and must be replaced).
The end bearing is enclosed in a pre-packed cartridge housing and must only be dismantled as necessary for relubrication, replacement, or when a
major overhaul is carried out on the generator set.

4. Install endbracket to the stator frame using the
proper screws and lock washers, but do not
tighten securely as yet.
5. Insert and start the threads of the bearing cartridge fasteners, and remove threaded alignment studs, through the endbracket into the
cartridge housing.

P7 Bearing Removal

6. Lift slightly on endbracket and remove wooden
shims holding rotor on center with stator.

1. Remove the endbracket (complete steps 1
through 16 of the Main Stator and Rotor Removal (P7) procedure.

7. Securely tighten the endbracket fasteners.

2. Remove the four screws holding bearing cap.

8. Tighten the bearing cartridge fasteners to 4.5
ft-lbs. (6 Nm) torque.

3. Remove cap.

9. Install the PMG assembly. Refer to Permanent
Magnet (PMG) Installation procedure.

4. Remove circlip.
5. Remove bearing cartridge housing complete
with bearing.

P7 Bearing Lubrication
A grease fitting is provided to allow re-greasing of
the bearing with a grease gun (see Operator’s
manual for grease quantities/type, maintenance intervals, and procedure).

P7 Bearing Replacement
The instruction sheet provided with the bearing kit is
required to complete the following procedure.

6-11

HC6 Bearing Removal

HC6 Bearing Lubrication

1. Remove the endbracket (complete steps 1
through 16 of the Main Stator and Rotor Removal (P7) procedure.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Bearing Lubrication: When re-lubricating or replacing the bearing, review the following.
 Recommended Lubricant: Lithium based
grease, Mobilux No. 2 or Shell Alvania R3.
 Temperature Range: -22F to +248F (-30C to
+120C).
 Quantity: 2.74 oz. (81 ml). The grease should
be equally divided between the bearing, the
bearing cap cavity, and the bearing cartridge
cavity.

Remove the four screws holding bearing cap
Remove cap.
Remove circlip.
Remove bearing cartridge housing complete
with bearing.

HC6 Bearing Replacement
When replacing bearing onto rotor shaft, be sure to
apply pressing force to the inner face of the bearing
only.

6-12

GENERATOR DISASSEMBLY

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable to
prevent accidental starting of the generator set
while servicing.

The following procedures provide information for
removal and reassembly of the generator PMG exciter, control housing, and stator/rotor assemblies.
Be sure to read through this section first, before performing procedures listed, to determine the steps
most appropriate for the service attention required.

2. HC6 Control Housing: Remove the control
housing grille and access covers (see Figure
6-7).
3. Remove the three M5X12mm capscrews and
lockwashers from the PMG cover, and remove
cover.

Two types of generators (P7 or HC6) are used with
these generator set models. The major difference
between these two generators is the lifting eye locations on the generator and the type of control housing. The control housing for the HC6 generator is
shown in Figure 6-7 and the control housing for the
P7 generator is shown in Figure 6-8. In the following
procedures, if the step only applies to a particular
control housing or generator, it will be noted at the
beginning of the step (e.g., HC6 control housing, P7
generator, etc.)

4. Disconnect the PMG wiring harness connector.
5. Remove the four bolts and clamps retaining the
exciter stator housing to the endbracket.
6. Tap the stator housing out of its spigot, and
carefully remove from generator endbracket.
The highly magnetic rotor will attract the stator
core; care must be taken to avoid any contact
which may damage the windings.

7. Remove the hex head through-bolt from the rotor shaft and firmly pull the complete rotor assembly from its location. Keep the rotor clean
by avoiding contact with metal dust or particles.

Permanent Magnet (PMG) Removal
WARNING Ignition of explosive battery gases
can cause severe personal injury or death. Arcing at battery terminals, light switch or other
equipment, flame, pilot lights and sparks can ignite battery gas. Do not smoke, or switch
trouble light ON or OFF near battery. Discharge
static electricity from body before touching batteries by first touching a grounded metal surface.

CAUTION The rotor assembly must not be
dismantled, or the magnetic properties will
be destroyed.

Permanent Magnet (PMG) Installation
1. Install the complete rotor assembly to the end
of the main rotor shaft using the hex head
through-bolt. Keep the rotor clean by avoiding
contact with metal dust or particles.

Ventilate battery area before working on or near
battery—Wear goggles—Stop genset and disconnect charger before disconnecting battery
cables—Disconnect negative (−) cable first and
reconnect last.

2. Carefully locate the stator housing to position
on the generator endbracket. Fasten in place
using the 4 bolts and clamps, and tighten securely.
The highly magnetic rotor will attract the stator
core, care must be taken to avoid any contact
which may damage the windings.

Disconnect battery charger from AC
source before disconnecting battery cables.
Otherwise, disconnecting cables can result in
voltage spikes damaging to DC control circuits
of the set.
CAUTION

3. Connect the PMG wiring harness connector.
4. Install the PMG assembly cover using the three
M5x12mm capscrews and lockwashers, and
tighten securely.

WARNING Accidental starting of the generator
set can cause severe personal injury or death.
Prevent accidental starting by disconnecting
the negative (−) cable from the battery terminal.

5. HC6 Control Housing: Install the control housing grille and access covers (see Figure 6-7).

6-13

CONTROL HOUSING
ACCESS COVERS
(BOTH SIDES)

CONTROL HOUSING

PMG ASSEMBLY

GENERATOR
AIR DISCHARGE
COVERS
CONTROL HOUSING
GRILLE

GENERATOR AIR INLET
COVER (ROTATING
RECTIFIER ACCESS)

FIGURE 6-7. HC6 GENERATOR AND CONTROL HOUSING ASSEMBLY

CONTROL HOUSING
ACCESS COVERS
(BOTH SIDES)

CONTROL HOUSING

PMG
ASSEMBLY
GENERATOR AIR INLET
COVER (ROTATING
RECTIFIER ACCESS)

GENERATOR
AIR DISCHARGE
COVERS

FIGURE 6-8. P7 GENERATOR AND CONTROL HOUSING ASSEMBLY

6-14

Main Stator and Rotor Removal

b. Remove control housing fasteners, and
remove the control housing assembly
from the generator. Replace panel fasteners to their respectable positions for safe
keeping, and tighten finger-tight.
c. Remove control housing mounting brackets from both sides of generator, and assemble lifting eyes to generator.
8. P7 Control Housing Removal:

1. Remove the PMG, refer to Permanent Magnet
PMG Removal, earlier this section.
2. Remove the air inlet and discharge panels and
access covers from control housing and generator (see Figure 6-7 or 6-8).
3. Disconnect all load wires from the reconnection terminal block assembly. If equipped with
the circuit breaker option, disconnect load
wires from circuit breaker. Check that all leads
are labeled to ease reassembly.

a. Loosen the fasteners that secure the control housing side panels to generator.
Make sure that hoisting device is controlling weight of control housing assembly.
b. Remove control housing fasteners, and
remove the control housing assembly
from the generator. Replace panel fasteners to their respectable positions for safe
keeping, and tighten finger-tight.

4. Disconnect the remote control wiring and conduit from the accessory box. For reconnections
later, make sure each wire is clearly marked to
indicate the correct terminal.
5. Disconnect the engine harness connectors
and remove harness assembly from the control
housing:

PLACE SLING STRAPS
THROUGH HOUSING
(P7 OR HC6 HOUSING)

 P4 and P5 from the back side of the control
panel box.

ACCESSORY
BOX

 PMG2 through PMG4, F1 and F2 generator leads located inside the control housing assembly.

 P6 (Governor Output Module), P7 and

P10 (Voltage Regulator OUtput Module)
and J12 (from P12 of the rail assembly), located inside the accessory box.
6. Use a hoist or similar lifting device to support
the control housing assembly (see Figure 6-9).
WARNING To prevent personal injury, use
adequate lifting devices to support heavy
components. Keep hands and feet clear
while lifting.

7. HC6 Control Housing Removal:
a. Loosen the fasteners that secure the control housing side and bottom panels to
generator. Make sure that hoisting device
is controlling weight of control housing assembly.

RECONNECTION
TERMINALS

FIGURE 6-9. REMOVING CONTROL HOUSING

6-15

9. Remove as necessary, air intake components
to engine that may interfere with disassembly
and reassembly of generator.

GENERATOR
LIFTING
POSITIONS

CAUTION Do not use fan blade to bar over
engine. That can damage blades and cause
property damage and personal injury.
10. Crank or bar the engine/generator to position
the rotor such that a full pole face is at the bottom of the main stator core. Proper positioning
can be viewed through the generator access
openings. Refer to engine service manual for
proper cranking or barring procedure.

To remove the stator and rotor at the same time, refer
to step 28. To remove the stator and rotor individually, continue with step 11.

11. Remove the four bolts retaining the bearing
cartridge housing in the endbracket (outer four
bolts).

MOUNTING FEET
BRACKETS

12. Remove the eight bolts holding the endbracket
to the generator housing.

FIGURE 6-10. HC6 GENERATOR LIFTING
POSITIONS

13. Insert two bolts (M10) in the two holes provided
for “jacking” purposes, on the endbracket center line. Screw bolts in until endbracket spigot
is clear of locating recess.

GENERATOR
LIFTING EYE
LOCATION

14. Carefully tap the whole assembly off the bearing cartridge housing, ensuring the endbracket
is supported to prevent the exciter stator from
damaging the windings on the exciter rotor.
WARNING To prevent personal injury, use
adequate lifting devices to support heavy
components. Keep hands and feet clear
while lifting.
15. The exciter stator is now accessible for inspection and removal from endbracket/engine
adaptor.

16. The end bearing can now be removed if required. Refer to Bearing Inspection/Removal/
Replacement in this section.

MOUNTING FEET
BRACKET

17. Remove the fasteners from the two generator
mounting feet brackets.
18. Attach cables of lifting device to generator lifting points (Figures 6-10 or 6-11).

FIGURE 6-11. P7 LIFTING POSITION

6-16

20. Disconnect the grounding strap from the flywheel housing.
21. Using a forklift, position a lifting bar of the forklift
(inside and inline with the generator) under the
rotor shaft. Lift the rotor shaft slightly so that rotor is not resting on inside of stator assembly.
See Figure 6-12 or 6-13.

19. Using an adequate lifting device, lift the generator (at lifting eyes provided, and main stator
housing) until the mounting feet brackets are
clear of the frame member (see Figure 6-12 or
6-13).

STATOR
ASSEMBLY
LIFT

ROTOR
ASSEMBLY
LIFT

USE FORKLIFT OR
OTHER ADEQUATE
LIFTING DEVICE TO
SLIGHTLY LIFT ROTOR
SHAFT UNTIL ROTOR
CAN BE SUPPORTED
BY HOIST/SLING.

STATOR
ASSEMBLY

ROTOR
ASSEMBLY

FIGURE 6-12. REMOVING HC6 STATOR ASSEMBLY

6-17

USE FORKLIFT OR
OTHER ADEQUATE
LIFTING DEVICE TO
SLIGHTLY LIFT ROTOR
SHAFT UNTIL ROTOR
CAN BE SUPPORTED
BY HOIST/SLING.

STATOR
ASSEMBLY
LIFT

STATOR
ASSEMBLY

ROTOR
ASSEMBLY
LIFT

ROTOR
ASSEMBLY

FIGURE 6-13. REMOVING P7 STATOR ASSEMBLY

6-18

22. Verify that the stator is adequately supported
and then carefully remove the capscrews from
the stator attachment ring.

Drive disc damage can be
caused by allowing the rotor assembly to
hang on flywheel. Use adequate hoist and
sling to support the rotor assembly.
24. Reposition or add hoist and sling support for
the main rotor, and remove the forklift. See Figure 6-14, Rotor Lift detail.
CAUTION

WARNING To prevent personal injury, use
adequate lifting devices to support heavy
components. Keep hands and feet clear
while lifting.

WARNING To prevent personal injury, use
adequate lifting devices to support heavy
components. Keep hands and feet clear
while lifting.
25. Remove the stator assembly, being careful not
to drag the windings on the rotor. Place stator
assembly away from the chassis in the horizontal position.

Improper stator assembly rigging and handling can result in damage to
stator and rotor assemblies. Lifting eyes
may not be at center-of-gravity position of
stator assembly. Therefore, lifting and moving the stator assembly alone, by hoisting
at lifting eyes only, presents the hazard of
load imbalance; allowing one end to drop
and other end to rise. Make sure the stator
is adequately hooked/strapped to maintain
level control of stator assembly while lifting
and moving.
CAUTION

26. Using the hoist and sling to support the rotor,
carefully remove the capscrews and flat washers that secure the drive discs to the engine flywheel.
WARNING To prevent personal injury, use
adequate lifting devices to support heavy
components. Keep hands and feet clear
while lifting.
27. Remove the rotor assembly and place it on
wood blocks in the horizontal position. To avoid
possible distortion, do not allow the drive discs
and fan to rest on anything.

23. Being careful not to drag the windings on the
rotor, move the stator assembly sufficiently
away from engine to sling and support the rotor
assembly. Do not allow rotor assembly to hang
on engine flywheel.

6-19

EXCITER
STATOR

RECONNECTION
TERMINALS

ENDBRACKET
PMG
STATOR

STATOR

END
BEARING

BLOWER

PMG
ROTOR

COUPLING

EXCITER
ROTOR
ROTATING
RECTIFIER
ASSEMBLY
ROTOR
DRIVE
DISCS

FRAME

ENDBRACKET/ENGINE
ADAPTOR
PRESSURE
PLATE

ROTOR
SHAFT

AIR DISCHARGE
COVERS

STATOR LIFT
(EXAMPLE)

ROTOR LIFT
(EXAMPLE)

FIGURE 6-14. TYPICAL GENERATOR ASSEMBLY

6-20

Generator Assembly Removal

To prevent personal injury, use
adequate lifting devices to support heavy
components. Keep hands and feet clear
while lifting.
WARNING

28. Remove the fasteners from the two generator
mounting feet brackets.
29. Attach cables of lifting device to generator lifting points (Figures 6-10 or 6-11).

CAUTION Improper generator assembly
rigging and handling can result in damage
to stator and rotor assemblies. Lifting eyes
may not be at center-of-gravity position of
stator assembly. Therefore, lifting and moving the generator by hoisting at lifting eyes
only, presents the hazard of load imbalance; allowing one end to drop and other
end to rise. Make sure the generator is adequately hooked/strapped to maintain level
control of assembly while lifting and moving.
34. Remove the generator assembly away from
engine. Place generator assembly on floor with
a piece of wood beneath the stator housing (toward PMG end) to allow for endbracket removal, if desired.

30. Using an adequate lifting device, lift the generator (at lifting eyes provided, and main stator
housing) until the mounting feet brackets are
clear of the frame member.
31. Disconnect the grounding strap from the flywheel housing.
32. Carefully remove the capscrews and flat washers that secure the drive discs to the engine flywheel.
33. Verify that the generator assembly is adequately supported. Carefully remove the capscrews securing the engine adaptor endbracket
to the engine flywheel housing.

6-21

GENERATOR REASSEMBLY

4. Connect the grounding strap to the flywheel
housing using a capscrew and EIT locking
washer; and tighten securely.

Generator reassembly is the reverse of disassembly procedure.

5. Install the mounting feet bracket fasteners; and
tighten securely.

To assemble the stator and rotor at the same time,
continue with step 1. To assemble the stator and rotor individually, skip to step 16.

If endbracket has been removed, continue with
step 6, otherwise skip to step 15.

1. Using an adequate lifting device, locate the
generator assembly into position near the engine flywheel housing. Align the holes of the rotor drive discs with the holes of the engine flywheel. Install the capscrews and flat washers
that secure the drive discs to the engine flywheel, hand tighten.

6. Lift slightly on end of rotor shaft and install
wooden shims to hold rotor on center with stator.
7. If removed, install end bearing. Refer to Bearing Inspection/Removal/Replacement procedure in this section.

WARNING To prevent personal injury, use
adequate lifting devices to support heavy
components. Keep hands and feet clear
while lifting.

8. Install two threaded studs into end bearing cartridge to aid subsequent procedures. Position
the end bearing cartridge assembly close to
proper position for hole alignment with endbracket.

CAUTION Improper generator assembly
rigging and handling can result in damage
to stator and rotor assemblies. Lifting eyes
may not be at center-of-gravity position of
stator assembly. Therefore, lifting and moving the generator by hoisting at lifting eyes
only, presents the hazard of load imbalance; allowing one end to drop and other
end to rise. Make sure the generator is adequately hooked/strapped to maintain level
control of assembly while lifting and moving.
2. Align the holes of the engine adaptor endbracket with the holes in the flywheel housing and
install the capscrews and lock washers. Tighten fasteners to 95−105 ft-lbs. (129−142 Nm).

9. Assemble exciter stator, if removed, to inside of
endbracket. Tighten fasteners to 4.5 ft-lbs. (6
Nm) torque.
10. Install endbracket to the stator frame using the
proper capscrews and lock washers, but do not
tighten securely as yet.
11. Insert and start the threads of the bearing cartridge fasteners, and remove threaded alignment studs, through the endbracket into the
cartridge housing.
12. Lift slightly on endbracket and remove wooden
shims holding rotor on center with stator.
13. Securely tighten the endbracket fasteners.

3. Secure the rotor assembly to the flywheel.
Tighten fasteners to 150−180 ft-lbs.
(204−245Nm).

14. Tighten the bearing cartridge fasteners to 4.5
ft-lbs. (6 Nm) torque.

6-22

15. Install the PMG assembly, if removed. Refer to
Permanent Magnet (PMG) Installation.

Drive disc damage can be
caused by allowing the rotor assembly to
hang on flywheel. Use adequate hoist and
sling to support the rotor assembly.
20. Reassemble engine adaptor endbracket to
stator frame if removed. Using an adequate lifting device, carefully move the stator into position over the rotor assembly, being careful not
to drag the windings on the rotor.
CAUTION

Perform the ‘Aligning Generator with Engine’
procedures, later in this section, then return to
the following steps.
To assemble the control housing, skip to step
35.

WARNING To prevent personal injury, use
adequate lifting devices to support heavy
components. Keep hands and feet clear
while lifting.

To assemble the stator and rotor individually begin here.

16. If removed, replace exciter rotor and rotating
rectifier assembly to main rotor shaft. Reconnect main rotor wire leads to positive and negative terminals of rectifier assembly.

CAUTION Improper stator assembly rigging and handling can result in damage to
stator and rotor assemblies. Lifting eyes
may not be at center-of-gravity position of
stator assembly. Therefore, lifting and moving the stator assembly alone, by hoisting
at lifting eyes only, presents the hazard of
load imbalance; allowing one end to drop
and other end to rise. Make sure the stator
is adequately hooked/strapped to maintain
level control of stator assembly while lifting
and moving.
21. Using a forklift, position a lifting bar of the forklift
(inside and inline with the generator) under the
rotor shaft. Lift the rotor shaft slightly so that rotor is not resting on inside of stator assembly.

17. If removed, install the drive disk spacer, drive
disc and pressure plate on the rotor shaft.
Install the cap screws and flat washers and
tighten to 607 ft-lbs. (822 Nm).
18. Using a hoist and sling to support the rotor,
align the holes in the drive disc with the corresponding holes in the flywheel.
WARNING To prevent personal injury, use
adequate lifting devices to support heavy
components. Keep hands and feet clear
while lifting.

22. Remove the hoist/sling support of the rotor assembly. Align the holes of the engine adaptor
endbracket with the holes in the flywheel housing and install the capscrews and lock washers. Tighten fasteners to 95−105 ft-lbs.
(129−142 Nm).

19. Secure the rotor assembly drive disc to the flywheel using appropriate capscrews and flat
washers. Tighten fasteners to 150−180 ft-lbs.
(204−245Nm) Do not allow rotor assembly to
hang on engine flywheel.

6-23

23. Connect the grounding strap to the flywheel
housing using a capscrew and EIT locking
washer; and tighten securely.

Perform the ‘Aligning Generator with Engine’
procedures, later in this section, then return to
step 35.

24. Install the mounting feet bracket fasteners; and
tighten securely.

35. HC6 Control Housing: Remove generator lifting eyes. Reassemble control housing mounting brackets to sides of generator and fasten
securely.

25. Lift slightly on end of rotor shaft and install
wooden shims to hold rotor on center with stator.

WARNING To prevent personal injury, use
adequate lifting devices to support heavy
components. Keep hands and feet clear
while lifting.
36. Use an adequate lifting device to lift the control
housing in position for mounting to the stator
frame. Replace the capscrews and lock washers and tighten to 20 ft-lbs. (27 Nm) torque.

26. If removed, install end bearing. Refer to Bearing Inspection/Removal/Replacement procedure in this section.
27. Install two threaded studs into end bearing cartridge to aid subsequent procedures. Position
the end bearing cartridge assembly close to
proper position for hole alignment with endbracket.

37. Connect all control wires and generator leads
using the proper generator set AC and DC wiring diagram/schematic.

28. Assemble exciter stator, if removed, to inside of
endbracket. Tighten fasteners to 4.5 ft-lbs. (6
Nm) torque.

38. Reassemble any engine air intake components removed during generator disassembly.

29. Install endbracket to the stator frame using the
proper capscrews and lock washers, but do not
tighten securely as yet.

39. Reassemble the covers over the generator air
discharge openings and fasten securely.
40. Refer to Permanent Magnet (PMG) Installation
procedure in this section.

30. Insert and start the threads of the bearing cartridge fasteners, and remove threaded alignment studs, through the endbracket into the
cartridge housing.

41. If equipped with the circuit breaker option, reconnect load wires to circuit breaker. Reconnect all lead wires to the terminal block assembly using proper reconnection diagram in Section 9.

31. Lift slightly on endbracket and remove wooden
shims holding rotor on center with stator.
32. Securely tighten the endbracket fasteners.
33. Tighten the bearing cartridge fasteners to 4.5
ft-lbs. (6 Nm) torque.

42. Verify that all connections are proper and secure and then install the air inlet panel and access covers to control housing.

34. Install the PMG assembly, if removed. Refer to
Permanent Magnet (PMG) Installation.

43. Connect the negative (-) battery cable and test
the generator set for operation.

6-24

ALIGNING GENERATOR WITH ENGINE

flex in alternate directions twice for each engine revolution. It is important to minimize the amount of
disc flexing since, if it is excessive, the drive disc will
crack. Although perfect bearing alignment is desirable, it is more important to keep disc deflection to
the minimum possible. This procedure assumes
that the pilot bore of the drive discs are in the exact
center and the flywheel counterbore (pilot) has no
practical runout. Under these conditions, perfect
Angular alignment will be attained when no deflection of the disks is measured.
Excessive Axial misalignment will cause more generator vibration than Angular misalignment.

Proper alignment of the generator and engine assemblies is necessary to avoid premature wear and
improper operation of the genset. Review the following alignment conditions and procedures for
aligning the generator assembly to engine flywheel
housing.
Angular Misalignment: Is the result of the generator bearing center axis not aligning with axis of the
engine crankshaft. This condition creates an angle
between the generator shaft axis and the crankshaft axis. The cause of this type of misalignment is
usually shimming error.

Axial misalignment needs to be checked only when
an objectionable vibration is present.

Axial Misalignment: Is the result of the generator
shaft axis not aligning with engine crankshaft axis.
The tolerances in the bolted flywheel and drive disc
connection may add up to displace the generator
axially relative to the crankshaft axis.

Either type of misalignment may be present in a
generator set assembly, with angular misalignment
being the most common problem. Angular alignment may also be effected by set installation conditions and/or mishandling during shipping of the genset.

Misalignment Symptoms: If the assembly is allowed to run under these conditions, the discs must

6-25

Angular Alignment Procedure

disc at the bolt circle diameter, see Figure 6-15. Bar
the engine over in a clockwise rotation as viewed
from engine flywheel. Do not allow it to roll back on
compression at the end of the travel of each reading. It is unnecessary to zero the indicator since the
total indicator reading (T.I.R.) of the deflection measurement to the bolt heads is what is required. T.I.R.
will be the sum of the maximum positive and negative dial indicator readings as the engine completes
one revolution.

Accidental starting of the generator
set during this procedure presents the hazard
of severe personal injury or death. Make sure to
disconnect the negative (-) battery cable(s) before beginning.
WARNING

Fasten a dial indicator to either the generator shaft
or the cooling fan with the sensing point resting on
the capscrew head or the flat surface of the drive

SEE DETAIL A

DIAL
INDICATOR

CLAMP

FLEX
DISCS

GENERATOR AND
ENGINE
CRANKSHAFT
CENTERLINE

MOUNTING BOLT
TO DISC
MEASUREMENT

AXIAL
ALIGNMENT, SEE
FIGURE 6-17
DETAIL A

SHIMS

FIGURE 6-15. ANGULAR ALIGNMENT MEASUREMENT

6-26

Sample Generator Runout Readings

2. Measure the distance from the generator side
of the flex discs to the center of the generator
mounting bolt, refer to Figure 6-15. (For example; a HC6 Frame’s distance is 28.4”.)

When taking the deflection readings described,
make a diagram similar to the example shown in
Figure 6-16, where a total indicator reading of .025”.
(The highest positive value of +.010 and the largest
negative value of -.015”.) The indicator is closer to
the top and further away at the bottom. This example indicates that the generator bearing is high.
Since the side readings are equal, the generator is
centered side to side. To lower the generator, remove equal shims from under both generator
mounting feet. To approximate the amount of shims
to remove or add:
1. Measure the distance between the center of
the generator shaft to the point the indicator is
measuring at. (For example; a SAE 18 Disc
coupling distance is 10.7”).

3. Compare the distance measured in steps 1 and
2. (28.4” vs 10.7” or a 2.65 to 1 ratio.) Multiply
this ratio times one half the T.I.R. (In our example, .025” divided by 2 is .0125”. This, times
2.65 equals .033”. Therefore, remove .033” of
shims from under both mounting feet.)
In general, the T.I.R. should not be more than .001”
for each inch of radius (center of shaft to indicator
axis). If we use our example of 10.7”, then the maximum T.I.R. would be .011”. This would only require
a correction of .014” from the T.I.R. of .025”. (A reading of +.002 at the top and -.009 at the bottom would
fall within the satisfactory range.)

+.010

+.010

MEASURED AT
BOLT CIRCLE
DIAMETER
-.002
-.004
10.7 IN.

-.010
-.010

-.015

-.015

FIGURE 6-16. ANGULAR ALIGNMENT MEASUREMENT READINGS (Example)

6-27

HC6 Axial Alignment Procedure

varying surface quality of the generator shaft’s drive
disc mountain hub.
The goal of the Axial realignment is to reduce the
vibration level of the genset while it is operating. A
small improvement in the T.I.R. runout may have
dramatic effects in the mechanically measured or
physically observed vibration levels.
To correct for an out of tolerance T.I.R. indication,
remove the capscrews connecting drive discs and
flywheel. Mark the drive discs and flywheel with respect to each other. Rotate either the engine or generator so that drive discs holes are repositioned
180 degrees from their original location. Put the
drive discs capscrews back in and retorque. Recheck shaft alignment as before. If shaft T.I.R. runout remains unchanged then the discs should be rotated to either 30, 60, or 90 degrees from original
location to correct the out of tolerance condition. If
the T.I.R. does not improve after repositioning, a
closer inspection of the flywheel pilot and drive disc
runouts is required. This will help determine the
cause of the Axial misalignment.

Axial misalignment needs to be checked only when
an objectionable vibration is present.

If excessive vibration remains after the angular
alignment, check for concentric alignment of the
generator shaft/engine crankshaft axes.
Fasten dial indicator holding device to skid base,
engine block, or generator shell with a magnetic
base or clamp and position so the sensor point of indicator rests on the generator shaft hub, see Figure
6-15. Bar the engine over in a clockwise rotation as
viewed from engine flywheel, through a couple of
rotations. Record indicator readings in eight equally
spaced points around the shaft diameter. This will
provide a T.I.R. for Axial shaft misalignment.
The maximum allowable T.I.R. runout is subjective,
the optimal T.I.R. for runout would be .000”, however, that may not be attainable. The recommendation
of this procedure will be to reduce the measured
T.I.R. runout by one half. Specific out-of-tolerance
runout levels are difficult to establish due to the

ANGULAR ALIGNMENT,
SEE FIGURE 6-15

GENERATOR
SHAFT HUB
DIAL
INDICATOR

GENERATOR
AND ENGINE
CRANKSHAFT
CENTERLINE

CLAMP
SEE DETAIL A

FAN HOUSING
DETAIL A

FIGURE 6-17. HC6 AXIAL ALIGNMENT MEASUREMENT

6-28

P7 Axial Alignment Procedure

To correct for possible axial misalignment, remove
the capscrews connecting drive discs and flywheel.
Mark the drive discs and flywheel with respect to
each other. Rotate either the engine or generator so
that drive discs holes are repositioned two bolt
holes from their original location. Put the drive discs
capscrews back in and retorque. Recheck/record
vibration levels as before. Repeat this test until the
drive discs holes are repositioned 180 degrees from
their original location.

Axial misalignment needs to be checked only when
an objectionable vibration is present.

If excessive vibration remains after the angular
alignment, concentric alignment of the generator
shaft/engine crankshaft axes may be at fault.
The goal of the axial realignment is to reduce the
vibration level of the genset while it is operating. A
small improvement in the axial alignment may have
dramatic effects in the measured or physically observed vibration levels.

Review vibration data and position drive disc in lowest recorded level location.

6-29

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6-30

7. Day Tank Fuel Transfer Pump and Control
A fuel transfer pump and control are available when
a sub-base or in-skid day tank are provided. the automatic control operates the fuel pump to maintain a
reservoir of fuel in the day tank.

age of large quantities of fuel and loss of life and
property if the fuel is accidentally ignited. Installation and service must be performed by qualified persons in accordance with the applicable
codes, including environmental regulations.

Diesel fuel is highly combustible.
Improper installation of this kit can lead to spill-

Do not smoke near fuel and keep flames, sparks
and other sources of ignition well away.

WARNING

CONTROL

FUEL PUMP
AND MOTOR

FLEXIBLE FUEL
RETURN LINE

FLOAT SWITCH
ASSEMBLY

DAY
TANK

FUEL
GAUGE

FIGURE 7-1. TYPICAL IN-SKID DAY TANK INSTALLATION

7-1

FLEXIBLE FUEL
SUPPLY LINE

FUEL FILL
CAP

OPERATION

fuel into the tank if the control fails to operate
the pump automatically.

1. Push the control switch to the ON position for
automatic operation. The green SYSTEM
READY light will come on and the pump will fill
the tank if AC power is available for pumping
and DC power is available for the internal logic
circuits. The level of fuel in the tank will be automatically kept between a set of pump-on and
pump-off float switches.

The green PUMP ON light does not come on
when the switch is in the EMERGENCY RUN
position.

4. The red lights indicate fault conditions and the
need for service. The control panel includes the
following lights:
A. HI FUEL: The fuel in the tank has reached
an abnormally high level, indicating possible failure of the pump-off float switch.
The high-fuel float switch takes over as the
automatic pump-off switch. The HI FUEL
light stays on. The light can be RESET with
the panel switch when the fuel level drops
to normal, but will come back on again during the next pumping cycle if the fault remains.

When filling an empty tank, the red LO SHUTDOWN and LO FUEL lights will come on when
the control switch is pushed to the ON position.
This is normal. Push the panel RESET switch to
turn off the red lights after the tank has been
filled.
If the SYSTEM READY light does not come on,
check for correct AC and DC power connections. See Wiring Connections and Fuel Pump
Motor Connections below.

Continued operation with a
HI FUEL fault present can lead to spillage of large quantities of fuel if the
high-fuel float switch fails. Spilled fuel
can cause loss of life and property if it
is accidentally ignited, or environmental damage.

2. The green PUMP ON light indicates when the
pump is running. It will come on and go off as
fuel is pumped to maintain the proper level in
the tank.

WARNING

3. Push the control switch to the EMERGENCY
RUN position (momentary contact) to pump

SYSTEM READY (GREEN)
HI FUEL (RED)
LO FUEL (RED)
LO SHUTDOWN (RED)
BASIN (RED)
BLANK (RED)
PUMP ON (GREEN)

FIGURE 7-2. FUEL PUMP CONTROL PANEL

7-2

the day tank is refilling, RESET the light
with the panel switch.

B. LO FUEL: The fuel in the tank has
dropped to an abnormally low level, indicating possible failure of the pump-on float
switch. The lo-fuel float switch takes over
as the automatic pump-on switch. The LO
FUEL light stays on. The light can be RESET with the panel switch when the fuel
level rises to normal, but will come back on
again during the next pumping cycle if the
fault remains.

To restore engine operation following this
fault, both the pump control and the PCC
have to be RESET.

D. BASIN: Fuel has overflowed into the rupture basin (if provided), indicating possible
failure of both the pump-off and hi-fuel level float switches, or a leak in the day tank.
RESET the control after the fuel in the basin has been safely disposed of and the
cause of the overflow corrected.

C. LO SHUTDOWN: The fuel has dropped to
a level near the bottom of the tank, indicating an empty main fuel tank, pump failure
or possible failure of both the pump-on and
low-fuel level float switches. Further operation will allow air to enter the engine fuel
unit, causing shutdown and the necessity
to bleed the fuel unit to start up the engine
again. Connections should have been
made to Terminals TB1-14 and TB1-15 to
shut down the engine automatically (to
ground one of four customer fault inputs
on terminals A40-TB1-16, 17, 18, or 19). If
the light comes on, check the fuel level in
the main fuel tank and fill it if necessary. As

E. BLANK: For customer use.
The control fault circuits will trip and latch,
requiring RESET, even if AC power is lost.

5. Press the TEST switch to test the indicator
lights and pump operating circuits. Replace
any light that does not come on. The pump will
stop automatically after it has filled the tank to
the normal pump-off fuel level.
6. Press the reset button of the AC or DC circuit
breaker if either has tripped.

7-3

WIRING CONNECTIONS

C. If the control is equipped with a transformer, remove the jumpers between terminals
H1 and H3, and H2 and H4 and connect
the two jumpers between H2 and H3.

See Day Tank Pump Control Wiring diagram in Section 8 when making connections at the control box
terminal board. The following should be noted.

2. Attach a tag to the control box indicating the
supply voltage.

1. The control can be powered by 120 VAC or 240
VAC. The control is set up at the factory for connection to 240 VAC.

3. If a two lead wiring harness is provided, the
control does not include a power transformer.
To provide 24 VDC for the control circuit, connect terminal TB1-19 to the positive (+) terminal of the 24 V starter motor solenoid and
terminal TB-20 to the negative (-) terminal.

To convert the day tank controller from 240
VAC to 120 VAC, perform the following steps.
A. Remove the two jumpers between terminals TB1-6 and TB1-7 in the control box
and connect one between terminals
TB1-5 and TB1-6 and the other between
terminals TB1-7 and TB1-8.

4. To immediately shut down the engine when the
LO SHUTDOWN light comes on, connect terminal TB1-14 to a good grounding point on the
engine block and terminal TB1-15 to terminal
A40-TB2-16, 17, 18, or 19 (Customer Fault inputs). The customer fault input selected, must
be set for a shutdown operation (refer to SETUP MENU in Section 5).

B. Move selector switch S103 on the control
PCB to the up position for 120V.
C. If the control is equipped with a transformer, remove the two jumpers between terminals H2 and H3 and connect one
between H1 and H3 and the other between H2 and H4.

5. Terminals TB1-10 through TB1-17 and TB2-23
through TB2-27 are available for connections
to remote annunciators or to any one of the four
customer fault inputs of the PCC.

To convert the day tank controller from 120
VAC to 240 VAC, perform the following steps.

6. Terminal TB2-22 is available for connection of
a grounding signal to activate the blank red
light.

A. Remove the jumpers between terminals
TB1-5 and TB1-6, and TB1-7 and TB1-8
in the control box and connect the two
jumpers between terminals TB1-6 and
TB1-7.

7. Terminals TB1-8 and TB1-5 are available for
connection of a 120 or 240 VAC electric fuel
shutoff valve rated not more than 0.5 amps.
The voltage rating of the valve must correspond with the voltage utilized for the pump.
See Item 2 above.

B. Move selector switch S103 on the control
PCB to the down position for 240 VAC.

7-4

USE WITH PCC,
SEE DETAIL A

DETAIL A

GND
TO A40-TB1-22 (LOW FUEL)
TO A40-TB1-16,17,18, or 19 (RUPTURE BASIN)

FIGURE 7-3. FUEL PUMP CONTROL TERMINAL BOARD

7-5

FUEL TRANSFER PUMP MOTOR
CONNECTIONS

terminal on the lead connected at motor terminal P103-3.

Connect a replacement fuel transfer pump motor as
follows.

4. Cut the white lead from its ring connector at
motor terminal P103-4. Strip 1/2 inch (12 mm)
of insulation from the end of the white motor
lead for splicing to the wire harness lead
marked P103-WHITE.

1. Remove the end bell cover for access to the
motor wiring terminals.
2. Disconnect the brown lead from motor terminal
P103-3 and connect it to terminal P103-6. (Terminal P103-6 is an insulated receptacle for securing the end of the lead so that it cannot move
and touch the motor frame or a live terminal
and cause a short circuit.)

5. Connect each lead of the five-lead wiring harness to the motor terminal or lead marked on it.
6. Connect the red motor lead to the piggy-back
terminal at motor terminal P103-3.

3. Disconnect the red lead from motor terminal
P103-2. It will be connected to the piggy-back

7. Secure the end bell cover.

FIGURE 7-4. FUEL TRANSFER PUMP MOTOR CONNECTIONS

7-6

TESTING THE FLOAT SWITCH ASSEMBLY
The float switch assembly consists of 5 switches.
Each switch has a pair of color coded leads connected to a common jack.
To test the float switches, remove the fuel pump
control cover, disconnect the wiring jack and unscrew the assembly from the top of the day tank.
Test as follows:

SWITCH 5
J5

1. With an ohmmeter, test for electrical continuity
(switch closed) between each pair of colored
leads, while holding the assembly vertical. Replace the assembly if any switch is open (all the
readings should be zero).

SWITCH 4
SWITCH 3
SWITCH 2

2. Lift each float, in turn, to 1/8 inch (3 mm) below
the C-clip stop above it (use a feeler gauge)
and test for electrical continuity. Replace the
assembly if any switch does not open (all the
readings should be infinity).
3. Use pipe thread sealant when replacing the assembly.

SWITCH 1
J5
SWITCH 1 − SHUTDOWN
SWITCH 2 − LOW FUEL
SWITCH 3 − PUMP ON
SWITCH 4 − PUMP OFF
SWITCH 5 − HI FUEL

FIGURE 7-5. FLOAT SWITCH ASSEMBLY

7-7

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

7-8

8. Initial System Startup
GENERAL

cedures may be needed which are not described in
this section. Use your experience as the best guide
for enhancing these general guidelines to provide
the best process for the specific site which you are
servicing.

Do not perform any procedure in
this section on medimum voltage (601 through
15,000 volts) generator sets. Special equipment
and training is required to work on or around
medium voltage equipment. Operation and
maintenance must be done only by persons
trained and qualified to work on such devices.
Improper use or procedures will result in severe
personal injury or death.

In general, the startup process contains these major steps:

 Installation design review, including mechani-

cal and electrical support systems for the generator sets and paralleling equipment.
 Individual generator set preparation, operation
and performance review.
 Manual system operation.
 Automatic system operation and adjustments.

This section describes a process which can be used
in the initial startup and test of generator sets which
are paralleled using PowerCommand Digital Paralleling controls. PowerCommand Digital Paralleling
systems have many functions which are common to
traditional paralleling systems, but they are completely different in the way that these functions are
supplied in the system. The intent of this section is
to provide you with guidance in the initial running of
the equipment, so that you can perform this function
with as safe and efficient procedures as possible.






The accessory box of the PowerCommand Control contains high voltages when
the generator set is running. It can be energized
from the system bus and contain high voltages
even when the generator set is not running.
Contacting these high voltage components will
cause severe injury or death. Do not attempt to
service, operate or adjust the control unless
you have been trained in proper service techniques.

Black start testing of system.
Customer acceptance testing.
Customer training.
Issuing an installation report showing the work
done, system performance and customer acceptance.

EQUIPMENT APPLICATION REVIEW
The purpose of the equipment application review is
to visually inspect the installation to confirm that the
equipment has been installed within specified parameters and that the equipment can be started as
specified. Cummins technical application manuals
T-030 Liquid-Cooled Generator Sets and T-016
Paralleling and Paralleling Switchgear provide
guidance in evaluating installation requirements. It
is recommended that you use an installation review
report form, included at the end of this section, to
avoid missing any major points in the equipment review and simplify reporting of problem areas to the
installer or customer.

THE STARTUP PROCESS
The startup process described in this section is typical for paralleling systems which utilize PowerCommand Digital Paralleling equipment. Every paralleling system is different in its design and application,
so portions of the recommended procedures may
be inappropriate for your application, or some pro-

The system startup process should not proceed until the inspection and review are complete and all issues resolved.

8-1

INDIVIDUAL GENERATOR SET STARTUP

For paralleling applications, the default value of the
governor gain should be set to 70. See Section 5 −
Governor/Regulator menu for more information.
Generator sets that are shipped from the factory
without Cummins parallel gear are set up as single
units. For multiple unit paralleling applications you
must reconfigure the control. See Section 5 − Paralleling Setup menu.

The generator set should be properly serviced, with
proper levels of coolant and lubricants in the system. Care should be taken to remove all shipping
blocks and braces from the equipment. Complete
all pre-start service and checks as for a standard
non-paralleled generator set.

TABLE 8-1. TYPICAL PARALLEL SET-UP
PARAMETERS

Equipment needed to perform the startup:

 Two properly calibrated hand-held digital me-

FUNCTION

ters.

TYPICAL SETTING

ISOLATED BUS PARAMETERS

Be certain that the meters are rated for use on a
circuit operating at proper voltage.

 Phase rotation meter.
 PowerCommand service tool kit.
 Individual generator set and system drawings,
specific to the project being installed. Operator’s manual, including PC program documentation, if available.

A two channel strip chart recorder with voltage and
frequency modules is helpful, but not required for
the startup.
Operate the generator set RUN/OFF/AUTO switch
to the OFF position. Connect the generator set
starting and control batteries at their proper locations and verify that no fuses are blown (indicating
improper connections in the system). Verify that the
stationary battery chargers are properly installed
and wired and turn them on.
If the system includes a master control panel, verify
that control power is present in the master control
and operate the system mode select switch to the
manual operation position, so that the system does
not inadvertently receive a start signal. If the system
includes a touchscreen, PLC bridge/MUX or network interconnections, verify that these are all functional.

SYNC TIME LIMIT

120 seconds

− PWR LIMIT

10 percent

− PWR LIMIT (TIME)

3 seconds

PERM WIN-PHASE

 20 degrees (ISO bus)
 15 degrees (utility)

PERM WIN-TIME

0.5 seconds

SYNC GAIN

95

SYNC INTEGRAL

12

KW BALANCE

165

KVAR BALANCE

0

KW GAIN

6

KVAR GAIN

300

1ST START FAIL

10 seconds

RAMP UNLD TIME

30 seconds

RAMP UNLD LEVEL

20 percent

RAMP LOAD TIME

30 seconds

LOSS FIELD TIME

2 seconds

UTILITY PARAMETERS

Check the settings of the paralleling control functions. Typical values for these functions are shown
in Table 8-1. If the generator set was tested in parallel at the factory, do not modify these adjustments at
this time. Check the factory test report to verify that
the settings of the control match the test report.

8-2

BASE LOAD %

80 percent

PF LEVEL

1.00

KW GOVERN GAIN

100

KW INTEGRAL

4

KVAR GOVERN GAIN

300

KVAR INTEGRAL

200

RAMP LOAD TIME

10 seconds

RAMP UNLD TIME

10 seconds

switch on the front of the PowerCommand control.
Verify proper functioning of the breaker open and
close lamps on the PowerCommand Control and
proper operation of the manual breaker control
switches on the PowerCommand control.

Connect a jumper to the idle terminals of the generator set in the accessory box, so that it will start and
run initially at idle speed.
Verify that starting the generator set and energizing
the system bus will not cause hazards to other persons working in the vicinity of the equipment, or directly on the equipment or anything electrically connected to the equipment. Notify responsible persons in the building that the equipment may be energized and operating at any time.

Use extreme caution when performing phase relationship testing. The system is
energized and dangerous voltages are present
in many locations. Contact with energized parts
will cause serious injury or death. Do not attempt these tests unless you have proper
equipment for testing and are trained in its safe
use.

Start the generator set by operating the RUN/OFF/
AUTO switch to the RUN position. The generator
set should start and accelerate to idle speed. An idle
mode alarm should appear on the generator set digital display panel. Allow the generator set to run at
idle, taking care to note unusual noises or vibration
from the engine or alternator, leaking fluids or exhaust connections. Run the generator set at idle until the coolant temperature is greater than 100 degrees F (40 degrees C) Make any corrections necessary prior to continuing with the startup process.

Verify that the phase rotation of the generator set
matches the phase rotation of the utility service at
each transfer switch or breaker power transfer pair.
Correct generator set phase rotation to match utility
condition, if required, by reversing the phase L1 (A
or U) and L2 (C or W) connections on the generator
set output.
Note: The purpose of this procedure is to make sure
that the generator set output matches the bus phase
relationship. Later in the startup process the wiring
and interconnection of the bus and generator set PT
modules will be verified. Note that the PT/CT module
phases must be matched to the generator set phase
changes, or a FAIL TO SYNCHRONIZE alarm will occur.

Stop the generator set and remove the idle speed
jumper from the accessory box interconnection terminal block. Start the generator set by operating the
RUN/OFF/AUTO switch to the RUN position and
observe it accelerating to rated frequency and voltage. Calibrate and adjust all generator set metering
(if necessary) using the hand-held digital meter and
the procedure in Section 5 of this manual. Adjust the
generator set to proper voltage and frequency. Record the values of voltage and frequency so that all
units can be adjusted to the same values. Remember to save all changes and adjustments prior to
switching off the generator set.

If a master control is used in the system, make sure
that the main bus metering is functioning and properly calibrated.
Using the load bank or available load on the system,
check the generator set load carrying ability and the
transient performance of the generator set. Adjust
as necessary for proper generator set operation.
Disconnect the load from the system.

Make sure that the paralleling breaker is charged
and ready to close (power circuit breakers only) and
that the paralleling bus is de-energized. If the breaker is not charged, manually charge the breaker.
Manually close the paralleling breaker for the generator set. Most paralleling breakers will automatically re-charge on closing (power circuit breakers
only). When the charging cycle is complete, electrically open the breaker using the breaker open control switch on the front of the PowerCommand control. Close the breaker using the breaker close

Make sure that all alarm and shutdown circuits in
the generator set are functioning properly. Shut
down the generator set by switching the RUN/OFF/
AUTO switch to OFF.
Repeat the process described in this section for
each generator set in the system before moving on
to the next step of the startup process.

8-3

MANUAL SYSTEM OPERATION

erator set by pushing the breaker close pushbutton
on the front face of the PowerCommand control.
Check the phase relationship of the generator set
which is closed to the bus, with each individual generator set. This can be accomplished by starting the
second generator set in the system by operating the
RUN/OFF/AUTO control switch to the RUN position
and allow the generator set to start and accelerate
to rated speed and voltage. When generator set frequency and voltage have stabilized, operate the
display screen of the PowerCommand control to the
voltage and frequency screens and use the digital
display to verify that the generator set voltage and
frequency matches the bus voltage and frequency.

Once all generator sets in the system have been
successfully run individually, the generator sets are
ready for verification of manual paralleling capability.
Make sure that all generator set RUN/OFF/AUTO
control switches are placed in the OFF position and
that the master control switch (if used) is also in the
manual mode position.
Operate the control switch of one generator set to
the RUN position and allow the generator set to
start and accelerate to rated speed and voltage.
Manually close the paralleling breaker on this generator set by pushing the breaker close pushbutton
on the front face of the PowerCommand control. Allow the generator set to run at no load for the first
phase of the manual paralleling test.

Switch the display screen to the digital synchroscope (bus frequency) screen and observe the control phase relationship between the generator set
and the bus. When the phase relationship of the oncoming generator set is within the acceptance parameters programmed into the control, an asterisk
(*) will be displayed on the screen next to the phase
difference display.

Use extreme caution when performing phase relationship testing. The system is
energized and dangerous voltages are present
in many locations. Contact with energized parts
will cause serious injury or death. Do not attempt these tests unless you have proper
equipment for testing and are trained in its safe
use.

When the asterisk is displayed on the control panel,
check the phase relationship between the generator set and the bus. With the hand-held digital voltmeter, check the voltage from the line side to the
load side for each phase of the open paralleling
breaker on two phases simultaneously (Figure 8-1).
If the phase relationship is proper, the voltage
across the breaker (with the breaker open) should
be zero, or nearly zero on both phases when the
”synchronized” indicator lamp is on. The voltage of
the two meters should rise and fall at approximately
the same time.

Check the phase relationship of the generator set
output to its Bus PT module. The voltage difference
between the L1 phase on the input to the Bus PT
board and the generator set PT/CT board should be
zero. Repeat this process for each generator set in
the system.
Make sure that all generator set RUN/OFF/AUTO
control switches are placed in the OFF position and
that the master control switch (if used) is also in the
manual mode position.

Note: If the generator set output phase rotation
matches the bus and a PHASE ROTATION warning
appears when you attempt to close the paralleling
breaker, you should check the generator set and Bus
PT boards for proper wiring and interconnection.
Both the primary and secondary wiring in the Bus PT
board should be checked. See Table 4-28.

Operate the control switch of one generator set to
the RUN position and allow the generator set to
start and accelerate to rated speed and voltage.
Manually close the paralleling breaker on this gen-

8-4

VM1
(Open)
CB

To Load Bus

VM2

Accessory Box
Bus PT
Board (A39)

PT/CT
Board (A36)

Power Command Control

FIGURE 8-1. CHECKING PHASE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN GENERATOR SET AND SYSTEM BUS

Note: For applications where a wye connected generator set is paralleled to a delta connected bus, the
generator neutral bus must be floating and the neutral connection to the bus PT module must not be
used.

8-5

Make sure that the “charged” flag is present on the
paralleling breaker and push the breaker close
pushbutton on the PowerCommand Control to
manually close the oncoming set paralleling breaker and paralleling the generator set to the system
bus.

positive kilowatt reading on any generator set indicates a frequency misadjustment on at least one
generator set. Perform adjustments necessary to
eliminate circulating currents and kilowatt loads.
Save the generator set adjustments made prior to
switching off the generator set.

Note: The breaker close function operates through a
permissive relay function in the PowerCommand
Control, so the paralleling breaker will not close unless the generator set is properly synchronized with
the system bus.

With all generator sets running in parallel in manual
(RUN) mode, apply available load to the system.
Observe load sharing levels on the generator sets.
The units should share load proportionally. (The
%load and %amps meters on the PowerCommand
control should all read within plus or minus 5% of
each other.)

Perform the phase rotation verification on each
generator set in the system, prior to attempting to
close it to the live parallel bus for the first time.

Adjust load sharing parameters within control system to achieve proper load sharing. Save all
changes.

When all generator sets have been closed to the
bus, observe the voltage, frequency, amp load and
kilowatt load on each generator set metering set.
The metering should indicate identical voltage and
frequency readings on all generator sets in the system. Amp and kilowatt readings should all be zero.
With no load on the system, a positive amp load
reading on generator sets indicates a voltage difference between the generator sets in the system. A

If possible, operate the system at various load levels and verify proper operation at each level.
Remove all load from the system and return the
generator sets to their normal automatic mode by
placing the RUN/OFF/AUTO switch in the AUTO
position.

8-6

AUTOMATIC SYSTEM OPERATION

 The generator should run for its normal cooldown period and then shut down.

If the system includes a master control panel, move
the mode selection switch on that panel to the full
automatic position. Operate the test switch to cause
the system to automatically start and parallel all
generator sets.

When the unit has shut down, remove the ground
signal on the Load Demand termination point. The
generator set should start, build up to rated frequency and voltage, synchronize and parallel to the system bus. When it has closed to the bus, it should
ramp up to its proportional share of the total bus
load.

The generator sets should automatically start, accelerate to rated speed and voltage, synchronize
and parallel on the system bus. As the generator
sets synchronize and close to the system bus, observe the operation of the load adding (priority) control relays in the master control. (If load add control
relays are provided.) Observe and record the time
to synchronize for each generator set.

Repeat the load demand test for each of the generator sets in the system.
Switch off the test switch in the master control. All
the paralleling breakers should simultaneously
open and the generator sets should run for a cooldown period and shut down.

With all the generator sets running and closed to the
system bus, apply load to the running generator
sets, but at a low enough level that all the generator
sets need not be running in order to carry the bus
load. On one generator set, ground the Load Demand contact in the accessory box. The following
sequence should then occur:

Simulate a remote start in the master control. The
generator sets should automatically start, accelerate to rated speed and voltage, synchronize and
parallel on the system bus. Remove the remote
start jumper on the master control. The generator
set paralleling breakers should all open and the
generator sets should run for a cooldown period
and shut down.

 The ”LOAD DEMAND” shutdown message
should be displayed on the PowerCommand
digital display panel.

At this point the various control functions of the
master control can be tested and verified. Consult
the project drawings and specifications or approved
submittal documents for details on master control
functions and requirements.

 The load should ramp down on the generator
set to its minimum set point level.
 The generator set paralleling breaker should
open.

8-7

BLACK START TESTING

tures have stabilized. During this process, data
should be gathered to demonstrate the load
applied and the operational performance of the
system. It is customary to document the generator set performance during this period, by recording all values on all meters and engine
monitors every 15 minutes.
 When all required customer testing and verifications have been performed, return the system to normal power by restoring utility (mains)
power at the point where it was disconnected.
 Verify that the generator sets and power transfer devices all return to their normal ready-tostart states.

The black start testing process is designed to demonstrate that the entire on-site power system is
installed correctly and that system support equipment, such as day tanks, fuel pumps, or supplemental ventilation equipment, is designed and
installed correctly. It is primarily used in applications
where the paralleling system is intended to provide
emergency power in the event of a normal utility
(mains) power failure. The black start testing process is performed after the entire on-site power system is installed. This testing process is often performed in conjunction with the customer approval
testing, since it may be disruptive to the operation of
the facility and demand special arrangements to
avoid potentially dangerous or costly power failures
in the facility.

TEST REPORTS AND ACCEPTANCE
The technician performing the system startup
should issue a start up and test report to document
the work performed and demonstrate that the system is functional and operational. The exact requirements of this report will vary depending on
customer requirements, but should include, as a
minimum:

The specific details of this testing process are very
dependent on the design of the electrical and mechanical systems of the facility. In general the steps
in this process are as follows:

 A power failure is simulated in the facility by

opening the main power feeder in the building.
It is desirable to do this to be certain that critical
loads such as fuel pumps are fed from both the
generator and utility (mains) bus.

 The application and review and evaluation. A

 The generator sets start and parallel. The time



 Observe operation of all power transfer de-



 The generator sets should be run in parallel



required for the generator sets to start and parallel should be recorded and noted on the final
test report for the system.
vices, noting the time required to transfer.

with all available load in the building, at a minimum of approximately 30% of their standby
KW rating. The duration of the test should be
sufficient for the generator sets to reach their
normal operating temperatures. The load demand system (if provided in the system master
control) should be shut down until all generator
sets in the system have reached normal operation temperatures and their operation tempera-

copy of the site review checklist performed at
the start of the testing process might be included to document this step of the process.
A copy of the startup check list (a typical check
list is included at the end of this section), documenting the functions tested and that each
function performed properly.
Test data sheets documenting results of load
testing.
List of all the settings of each generator set
control.
Black start test results.


 Certification that the system is operational and

ready to run.
 It is customary for an owner’s representative to
review and sign all test documents, indicating
acceptance of the test data and system performance.

8-8

ON SITE POWER SYSTEM APPLICATION REVIEW (DIESEL/600VAC AND LOWER)
Date: ___________

Location: __________________________________________________________

Owner/Operator: ______________________________________________________________________
Generator Set Model:

____________________

Serial Number: ____________________

Transfer Switch Model: ____________________

Serial Number: ____________________

Project/Order Number: ________________________________________
Review Performed By: _____________________________
Mounting/Noise/Isolation
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]

[]
[]
[]
[]

Flexible power output conduit, supported by bldg.
Isolators/pad (integral to set)
Isolators/pad (external to set)
Isolators/spring-pad, adjusted correctly
Flexible stainless steel exhaust connection
Flexible fuel lines (supply& return), secured
Flexible power output conduit, supported by bldg.
Flexible auxiliary power connections
Flexible control connections
Flexible exhaust air duct
Seismic restraints (where required)
Provisions for draining oil/coolant
Clearance around genset (3ft/1 meter min.)
Fire alarm provisions
System covers/shields all in place

[]

Fuel System
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]

Exhaust
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]

Silencer close to genset
Exhaust connections sealed
Exhaust insulated
Proper personnel protection provided
Exhaust run slopes away from genset
Condensate trap with valve on exhaust silencer
Provisions for thermal expansion
Raincap/birdscreen on exterior of building
Exhaust thimble
Correct pipe size, supported by building
Facility vent air intake, windows, doors not close to
exhaust outlet
No combustible materials, or fire system
components near uninsulated pipe

[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]

Filled with soft water/E.G./DCA mixture
Jacket water heater provided
Valves to isolate jacket water heater
Power supply to heater from normal power

Control connections isolated from power
Control connections use stranded wire
Conductor size OK (power & control)
Proper battery size/filled with electrolyte
Battery rack isolated from floor
Battery charger/power from utility
Start signal wired to ATS
Generator frame grounded (bonded)
Neutral connection (where/how)
Power/control conductors torqued
Wiring accuracy/matches drawings

Other

Ventilation System
[]
[]

Piping is not galvanized or copper
Manual shut-off valve
Solenoid valve on fuel supply, power from set
Fuel returns to main tank
Fuel line size adequate
Fuel line high loops
Day tank/vent at highest point
Day tank/location below return lines
Day tank/strainer-filter
Day tank/level alarms
Main fuel tank below set
Fuel transfer pump/power from genset
Main fuel tank above set
Solenoid valve
Sub-base tank
Level gage
Vent

Electrical System

Cooling System
[]
[]
[]
[]

Heat sources in room insulated
Recirculation of radiator exhaust air unlikely
Access door to room opens in (or vented)
Vent dampers powered from emergency power
supply
Direction of prevailing winds

[]
[]
[]
[]

Inlet air duct properly sized (approx. 1.5x radiator)
Exhaust air duct properly sized (effective open area
not less than radiator area)

8-9

Oil installed in engine
Posted operating instructions
Generator/ATS manuals, drawings provided
Generator room/control boxes cleaned

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

8-10

9. Wiring Diagrams
GENERAL

 Page 9-13,Voltage Regulator Output Module
(A37)

This section consists of the schematic and connection wiring diagrams referenced in the text. The following drawings are included.

 Page 9-14, Governor Output Board (A38)
 Page 9-15, PT/CT Wiring Harness

 Page 9-2 and 9-3, AC Reconnect Wiring Dia-

 Page 9-16, Engine Wiring Harness

gram











 Page 9-17, Accessory Box Interconnection

Page 9-4, Block Diagram (12 Lead)

Harness Diagram

Page 9-5, Block Diagram (6 Lead)

 Page 9-18, Day Tank Pump Control Wiring

Page 9-6, Customer Connections

 Page 9-19 Accessory Interconnect Diagram

Page 9-7, Engine Interface Board (A31)

 Page 9-20, Sequence of Operation (Local Start

Page 9-8, Digital board (A32)

and Run)

Page 9-9, Analog board (A33)

 Page 9-21, Sequence of Operation (Local

Page 9-10, Customer Interface Board (A34)

Stop)

Page 9-11, Display Board (A35)

 Page 9-22, Sequence of Operation (Local

Page 9-12, PC/CT Board (A36)

Emergency Stop)

9-1

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

9-2

THIS IS A REPRESENTATIVE (GENERIC)
SCHEMATIC/WIRING DIAGRAM. FOR
TROUBLESHOOTING, REFER TO THE
WIRING DIAGRAM PACKAGE THAT WAS
INCLUDED WITH YOUR GENSET.

No. 625−3100 sh1 of 2
Rev. H Sys:CADAM
Modified 2/2011

AC RECONNECT WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 1 OF 2)

9-2

THIS IS A REPRESENTATIVE (GENERIC)
SCHEMATIC/WIRING DIAGRAM. FOR
TROUBLESHOOTING, REFER TO THE
WIRING DIAGRAM PACKAGE THAT WAS
INCLUDED WITH YOUR GENSET.

No. 625−3100 sh 2 of 2
Rev. H
Sys:CADAM
Modified 2/2011

AC RECONNECT WIRING DIAGRAM (SHEET 2 OF 2)

9-3

No. 612−6701 sh 1of 3
Rev. B Sys: HP
Modified 12/1996

BLOCK DIAGRAM (12 LEAD)

9-4

No. 612−6701 sh 2of 3
Rev. B Sys: HP
Modified 12/1996

BLOCK DIAGRAM (6 LEAD)

9-5

No. 612−6701 sh 3of 3
Rev. B Sys: hp
Modified 12/1996

PCC CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS

9-6

THIS IS A REPRESENTATIVE (GENERIC)
SCHEMATIC/WIRING DIAGRAM. FOR
TROUBLESHOOTING, REFER TO THE
WIRING DIAGRAM PACKAGE THAT WAS
INCLUDED WITH YOUR GENSET.

NO. 300-4819 sht 1 of 4
REV. B
MODIFIED 8/2008

ENGINE INTERFACE BOARD (31)

9-7

THIS IS A REPRESENTATIVE (GENERIC)
SCHEMATIC/WIRING DIAGRAM. FOR
TROUBLESHOOTING, REFER TO THE
WIRING DIAGRAM PACKAGE THAT WAS
INCLUDED WITH YOUR GENSET.

NO. 300−4079
REV. N
MODIFIED 4/2006

DIGITAL BOARD (A32)

9-8

THIS IS A REPRESENTATIVE (GENERIC)
SCHEMATIC/WIRING DIAGRAM. FOR
TROUBLESHOOTING, REFER TO THE
WIRING DIAGRAM PACKAGE THAT WAS
INCLUDED WITH YOUR GENSET.

NO. 300−4080
REV.e
MODIFIED 11/2000

ANALOG BOARD (A33)

9-9

THIS IS A REPRESENTATIVE (GENERIC)
SCHEMATIC/WIRING DIAGRAM. FOR
TROUBLESHOOTING, REFER TO THE
WIRING DIAGRAM PACKAGE THAT WAS
INCLUDED WITH YOUR GENSET.
CUSTOMER INTERFACE BOARD (A34)

9-10

NO. 300−4462 sh1
REV. J
MODIFIED 8/2008

U1

2

4

6

8

J5

10

12

18

BA8
BA9

20
22

BA10
BA11

24

J5

26

28
30

BRD
BCS7

48

J5

13

45

31

J5

J5

15

47

GND

PHASE_SELECT
U6

J1

12

1K

J1

5

5

4

U7

6

1K

6

1K

DISPLAY(LF_TOP)
U6
7

U7
1K

CB_OPEN
U6

10

14

3

4

1K

2

1K

CB_CLOSED
U6
3

J1

1

2

7

U7

8

1K

8

1K
U14
13 DISPLAY(LF_BOTTOM)1
U15
1K
1
2
1K
J1
U14
11
3
RESET_
U15
1K
3
4
1K
J1
U14
4 DISPLAY(RT_TOP)
5
TO
MEMBRANE SWITCH
U15
1K
5
6
1K
J1
U14
5 DISPLAY(RT_BOTTOM)7
U15
1K
7
8
1K
J1
U26
6
1
MENU
U26
1K
3
4
1K
J1
2
GND

J1

2

4

6

4
3
2
1
40
39
38
37
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
14
15
16
17
13
12
11
10

@VCC@VCC@VCC@VCC@VCC@VCC@VCC

8

56

RESET

2803A
10
CLAMP
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
GND 11
9
GND

U24

7555
B+8
B−
TRIG OUT3
RST DISC7
6
CV THOLD

9-11

U23

CR3
VCC

R34

10K

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

2803A
10
CLAMP
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
GND 11
9

220

VCC

BL

LP_OFF

R25
DS91

4.7K

DS93

GND

R2

NON−AUTO
R3

4
2 Red
Red

220

220

J6
SELF_TEST1
J6

CR2 SELF_TEST
CR6

GND

DISPLAY BOARD (A35)

R50
100

R47

U5

CLR
C17

22uF

C11
+

R32

7
10K

10K

R39

100K

R37

RESET

100K

.1uF

C1 .1uF

C3
C2 .1uF
.1uF

C6 .1uF

C8
C7 .1uF
.1uF

C13
C20 .1uF

U16

5 +3302
2
4−

.01uF

J5

+5V_REF

C10 .1uF

51

+12V

.1uF

J5

C19 .1uF

J5
TO
DIGITAL BOARD53

B+

C5
C12 .1uF

55

1
2
4
5

@VCC

VCC

VCC

R4
UPPER_SCALE
R5
220
Green
R8
DS143
220
4
LOWER_SCALE
R9
DS141
220
2 Green
Green
R23
DS233
4
PHASE_A220
R24 220
DS231
2 Green
Green
R28
DS273
4
PHASE_B220
R29 220
DS271
2 Green
Green
R35
DS293
4
PHASE_C220
R36 220
DS291
2 Green
Green
R21
DS22
220
3
4
UTILITY_CLOSED
R22 220
DS22
1
2 Red
Red
R40
DS363
220
4
GENERATOR_CLOSED
R41 220
DS361
2 Green
Green
R10
DS15
220
3
4
SHUTDOWN
R11 220
DS15
1
2 Red
Red
R12
DS113
220
4
ARROW_LEFT_TOP
R14 220
DS111
2 Green
Green
R16
DS203
220
4 ARROW_LEFT_BOTTOM
R17 220
DS201
2 Green
Green
R30
DS243
220
4
ARROW_RESET
R19 220
DS241
2 Green
Green
R13
DS123
220
4
ARROW_RIGHT_TOP
R1
DS121
220
2 Green
Green
R15
DS213
220
4
ARROW_RIGHT_BOTTOM
R18 220
DS211
2 Green
Green
R31
DS253
220
4
ARROW_MENU
R20 220
DS251
2 Green
Green
R6
DS13
220
3
4
WARNING
R7
DS13
220
1
2 Amber
Amber

VCC

.1uF

54

J5

BA0
BA1
BAD0
BAD1
BAD2
BAD3
BAD4
BAD5
BAD6

DS103
4
DS101
2 Green

2803A
10
CLAMP
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
GND 11
9

+5V_BAT

C15 .1uF

J5

DLG2416
CE1 A08
CE2 A17
11
CLR D0
D112
CUE D213
D314
BL
D417
WR D516
CU
D615

VCC

U13

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

BA0
BA1
BAD0
BAD1
BAD2
BAD3
BAD4
BAD5
BAD6

U11

1
2
CLR3
4
BL 18
GNDBWR 6
5

2

VCC
C22
C4 22uF+

3

DLG2416
BA0
CE1 A08
BA1
CE2 A17
11
BAD0
BAD1
CLR D0
D112
13
BAD2
CUE D214 BAD3
D317 BAD4
BL
D4 BAD5
WR D516
CU
D615 BAD6

GND

VCC

GND

J1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

DLG2416
CE1 A08
CE2 A17
11
CLR D0
D112
CUE D213
D314
BL
D417
WR D516
CU
D615

VCC

U21

U22

8255
8255
4
PA0
PA0
3
PA1
PA1
2
PA2
PA2
1
PA3
PA3
40
6
6
PA4 ‘CS
PA4
39
‘CS
BRDBRD 5
PA5 ‘RD 5
PA5
38
‘RD
PA6 ‘WR 36 BWRBWR 36
37
‘WR PA6
35
PA7 RESET 35
RESETPA7
9
18
BA0BA0 9
A0
A0 PB0
PB0
8
19
BA1BA1 8
A1 PB1
PB1 A1
20
PB2
PB2
21
GND
GND
PB3
PB3
22
34
34
BAD0BAD0
PB4 D0
PB4
23
D0
33 BAD1BAD1 33
PB5 D1
24
D1 PB5
32 BAD2BAD2 32
PB6 D2
25
D2 PB6
31 BAD3BAD3 31
PB7 D3
D3 PB7
14
30 BAD4BAD4 30
PC0 D4
D4 PC0
15
29
29
BAD5
BAD5
PC1 D5
D5 PC1
16
28 BAD6BAD6 28
PC2 D6
D6 PC2
17
27
27
BAD7BAD7
PC3 D7
D7 PC3
13
PC4
PC4
12
PC5
PC5
11
PC6
PC6
10
PC7
PC7
@VCC@VCC@VCC@VCC@VCC@VCC@VCC

1.8M

1

U20

U7

U4

1
2
CLR3
4
BL 18
GNDBWR 6
5

VCC

SELF_TEST

4.7M

7

1
2
CLR3
4
BL 18
GNDBWR 6
5

VCC

.1uF

J1

SELF_TEST

VCC

GND

R51

9

GND

DLG2416
BA0
CE1 A08
BA1
CE2 A17
11 BAD0
D0
CLR D112 BAD1
BAD2
CUE D213
BAD3
D314
BAD4
BL
D417
16
WR D515 BAD5
CU
D6 BAD6

U10

DLG2416
BA0
CE1 A08
BA1
CE2 A17
11
BAD0
BAD1
CLR D0
D112
13
BAD2
CUE D214 BAD3
D317 BAD4
BL
D4 BAD5
WR D516
CU
D615 BAD6

4.7K

J1

J5

J5

1
2
CLR3
4
BL 18
GNDBWR 6
5

R49

J5

29

U9

DLG2416
BA0
CE1 A08
BA1
CE2 A17
11
BAD0
BAD1
CLR D0
D112
13
BAD2
CUE D214 BAD3
D317 BAD4
BL
D4 BAD5
WR D516
CU
D615 BAD6

C18

BAD7

J5

1
2
CLR3
4
BL 18
GNDBWR 6
5
VCC

U8

1
2
CLR3
4
BL 18
GNDBWR 6
5

U5

46

J5

43

5
10K

J5

J5

11

U5

J5

BA12
BWR

27

J5

10K

BAD6

41

J5

6
10K

44

J5

9

U5

J5

25

J5

3
10K

J5

39

J5

U5
4

BAD5

J5

10K

42

J5

23

7

U3

DLG2416
BA0
CE1 A08
BA1
CE2 A17
11 BAD0
D0
CLR D112 BAD1
BAD2
CUE D213
BAD3
D314
BAD4
BL
D417
16
WR D515 BAD5
CU
D6 BAD6

VCC

U12

J5

J5

1
2
CLR3
4
BL 18
GNDBWR 6
5

VCC

Y012
Y13
Y24
Y35
Y46
Y57
Y68
Y79
Y810
Y9
Y1011
Y1113
Y1214
Y1315
Y1416
Y1517

BA223 A0
BA322 A1
BA421 A2
BA520 A3

6
10K

J5

J5

37

U5
2

BAD4

J5

BA6
BA7

J5

U2

DLG2416
BA0
CE1 A08
BA1
CE2 A17
11 BAD0
D0
CLR D112 BAD1
BAD2
CUE D213
BAD3
D314
BAD4
BL
D417
16
WR D515 BAD5
CU
D6 BAD6

10K

40

14

16

TO
DIGITAL BOARD

J5

J5
J5

21

5

U12

BAD3

J5

8
10K

38

J5

74HC154
18 CS1
BCS7
19 CS2
BA12

U12
7

J5

BA4
BA5

U25

35

10K

J5

J5

U12

BAD2

19

3

10
10K

36

J5

U12
9

J5

BA2
BA3

U12

J5

33

J5

4
10K

BAD1

1

U12

34

BA1

J5

J5

5
10K

J5

BA0 17

J5

U12

J5

1
2
CLR3
4
BL 18
GNDBWR 6
5

2
10K

BAD0

J5

U12

32

J5

3
10K

J5

THIS IS A REPRESENTATIVE (GENERIC)
SCHEMATIC/WIRING DIAGRAM. FOR
TROUBLESHOOTING, REFER TO THE
WIRING DIAGRAM PACKAGE THAT WAS
INCLUDED WITH YOUR GENSET.

2

QTY

+5V_BAT

+5V_BAT

TO
RUN/STOP/REMOTE
SWITCH

DWG

NO. 300−4286 sh 1
REV. M Sys. HP
MODIFIED 1/2008

THIS IS A REPRESENTATIVE (GENERIC)
SCHEMATIC/WIRING DIAGRAM. FOR
TROUBLESHOOTING, REFER TO THE
WIRING DIAGRAM PACKAGE THAT WAS
INCLUDED WITH YOUR GENSET.

NO. 300−4250 sh1
REV. C SYS. HP
MODIFIED 1/24/95

PC/CT BOARD (A36)

9-12

THIS IS A REPRESENTATIVE (GENERIC)
SCHEMATIC/WIRING DIAGRAM. FOR
TROUBLESHOOTING, REFER TO THE
WIRING DIAGRAM PACKAGE THAT WAS
INCLUDED WITH YOUR GENSET.

NO. 300−4085 sh1
REV. L
MODIFIED 10/2002

VOLTAGE REGULATOR OUTPUT MODULE (A37)

9-13

THIS IS A REPRESENTATIVE (GENERIC)
SCHEMATIC/WIRING DIAGRAM. FOR
TROUBLESHOOTING, REFER TO THE
WIRING DIAGRAM PACKAGE THAT WAS
INCLUDED WITH YOUR GENSET.

NO.300-4724 sh1
REV. J
MODIFIED 9/2005

GOVERNOR OUTPUT BOARD (A38)

9-14

THIS IS A REPRESENTATIVE (GENERIC)
SCHEMATIC/WIRING DIAGRAM. FOR
TROUBLESHOOTING, REFER TO THE
WIRING DIAGRAM PACKAGE THAT WAS
INCLUDED WITH YOUR GENSET.

NO. 338−3019 sh1
REV. T
MODIFIED 9/2011

PT/CT WIRING HARNESS

9-15

No. 338−3377 sh 2of 2
Rev. J Sys: revisio
Modified 4/2002

ENGINE WIRING HARNESS

9-16

THIS IS A REPRESENTATIVE (GENERIC)
SCHEMATIC/WIRING DIAGRAM. FOR
TROUBLESHOOTING, REFER TO THE
WIRING DIAGRAM PACKAGE THAT WAS
INCLUDED WITH YOUR GENSET.

No. 338−3199 sh1
Rev. M
Sys:CADAM
Modified 8/2003

ACCESSORY BOX INTERCONNECTION HARNESS DIAGRAM

9-17

NO. 625-2141
REV. R
MODIFIED 3/2006
DAY TANK PUMP CONTROL WIRING

9-18

THIS IS A REPRESENTATIVE (GENERIC)
SCHEMATIC/WIRING DIAGRAM. FOR
TROUBLESHOOTING, REFER TO THE
WIRING DIAGRAM PACKAGE THAT WAS
INCLUDED WITH YOUR GENSET.

NO.630−1345 sh1
REV. j
MODIFIED 11/1996

ACCESSORY INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM

9-19

No. 612-6679 sh 1 of 2
Rev. B Sys: HP
Modified 11/21/95

SEQUENCE OF OPERATION (LOCAL START AND RUN)

9-20

No. 612-6679 sh 2 of 2
Rev. B Sys: HP
Modified 11/21/95

SEQUENCE OF OPERATION (LOCAL STOP)

9-21

NO.612−6680 sh10f1
REV. A
MODIFIED 8/25/94

SEQUENCE OF OPERATION (LOCAL EMERGENCY STOP)

9-22

Cummins Power Generation
1400 73rd Ave. NE
Minneapolis, MN 55432 USA
Phone 1 763 574 5000
Toll-free 1 800 888 6626
Fax 1 763 574 5298
Email ask.powergen@cummins.com
www.cumminspower.com
CumminsR, the “C” logo, and “Our energy working for you.”
are trademarks of Cummins Inc.
E2011 Cummins Power Generation, Inc. All rights reserved.



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Annotate, Fill forms, Extract, Print high-res
Author                          : gh414
Create Date                     : 2011:11:15 15:37:46-06:00
Modify Date                     : 2015:05:18 20:52:45-05:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : gh414
Title                           : 900-0520D
Creator Tool                    : BroadVision, Inc.
Metadata Date                   : 2015:05:18 20:52:45-05:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 9.0.0 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:4120d76d-8b63-4572-af44-f9f99c968bc1
Instance ID                     : uuid:43a591ef-03c1-49c8-8b43-9cf9592465c3
Page Count                      : 219
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu